Sunteți pe pagina 1din 420

Foreword, Table of Contents

System Overview 1
SICAM SAS Basic Operating Instructions 2
Installation and Deinstallation 3
Configuration System
SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Getting Started 4
Manual
Substation Controller 5
Bay Device / Substation Connection 6
Control Center Connection 7
Information Routing and Distribution 8
Information Processing
in the Monitoring Direction 9
Information Processing
in the Control Direction 10
Downloading the Project Data
to the Target System 11
Archiving / Project Documentation 12
Appendix A
References, Glossary, Index

Release: 03.12.01
E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Notes on Safety This manual does not constitute a complete catalog of all safety measures required for
operating the equipment (module, device) in question because special operating conditions
might require additional measures. However, it does contain notes that must be adhered to
for your own personal safety and to avoid damage to property. These notes are highlighted
with a warning triangle and different keywords indicating different degrees of danger:

Danger
means that death, severe injury, or substantial damage to property will occur if the
appropriate safety measures are not taken.

Warning
means that death, severe injury, or substantial damage to property can occur if the
appropriate safety measures are not taken.

Caution
means that minor injury or damage to property can occur if the appropriate safety measures
are not taken.

Note
is important information about the project, handling the product, or the part of the
documentation in question, to which special attention must be paid.

Qualified Personnel
Commissioning and operation of the equipment (module, device) described in this manual
must be performed by qualified personnel only. As used in the safety notes contained in this
manual, qualified personnel are those persons who are authorized to commission, release,
ground, and tag devices, systems, and electrical circuits in accordance with safety
standards.
Use as Prescribed
The equipment (device, module) must not be used for any other purposes than those
described in the Catalog and the Technical Description. If it is used together with third-party
devices and components, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens.
Correct and safe operation of the product requires adequate transportation, storage,
installation, and mounting as well as appropriate use and maintenance.
During operation of electrical equipment, it is unavoidable that certain parts of this
equipment will carry dangerous voltages. Severe injury or damage to property can occur if
the appropriate measures are not taken:
Before making any connections at all, ground the equipment at the PE terminal.
Hazardous voltages can be present on all switching components connected to the
power supply.
Even after the supply voltage has been disconnected, hazardous voltages can still be
present in the equipment (capacitor storage).
Equipment with current transformer circuits must not be operated while open.
The limit values indicated in the manual or the operating instructions must not be
exceeded; that also applies to testing and commissioning.

Disclaimer of liability Copyright


We have checked the contents of this publication and every effort Copyright Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved
has been made to ensure that the descriptions of both hardware This document shall not be transmitted or reproduced, nor shall its
and software are as accurate as possible. However, deviations from contents be exploited or disclosed to third persons without prior
the description cannot be completely ruled out, so that no liability written consent from Siemens. Infringements shall entitle Siemens
can be accepted for any errors or omissions contained in the infor- to damages. All rights reserved, in particular in case of a patent
mation given. The data in this manual are checked regularly and the grant or utility model registration.
necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Any
suggestions for improvement are welcome. Registered Trademarks
SIMATIC, SIMATIC NET, SINAUT and SICAM are registered
The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior no- trademarks of SIEMENS AG. All other product and brand names in
tice. this manual may be trademarks, the use of which by third persons
4.00.00 for their purposes may infringe the rights of their respective owners.

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Document No. E50417-H8976-C017-A4


Foreword

Purpose of This manual is a guide and reference work for planning, configuring, and
this manual parameterizing the SICAM SAS substation automation system using the
SICAM plusTOOLS configuration system for SAS.
In Chapter Getting Started, the manual guides the user step by step
through operating the system software using an example. The
knowledge acquired here is then broadened in the other chapters.

Target group This manual is mainly aimed at customers and their employees whose
job it is to configure and parameterize substation automation systems.

Scope of validity of SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS, Version 4.0.


this manual

Standards This document has been created according to the ISO 9001 quality
standards.

Further If you have any questions about the SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS
support system, please contact your Siemens sales representative.

Hotline Our hotline offers you around-the-clock support.


Tel.: ++49 -180 - 5 24 70 00
Fax: ++49 -180 - 5 24 24 71
e-mail: services@ptd.siemens.de

Training courses If you are interested in our topical training program, please contact our
training center:
Siemens AG
Power Transmission and Distribution
PTD SE Training Center
Humboldtstr. 59
90459 Nuremberg
Germany
Phone: ++49 - 911 - 4 33 70 05
Fax: ++49 - 911 - 4 33 79 29
Internet: www.ptd-training.com

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual i


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Foreword

Documentation Overview

This overview will give you a rough idea of which information or guideline
can be found in which manual.

Planning Which hardware and software components are necessary for


covering the requirements of my project?
Can I integrate existing components?
Can I use my PC?
Which system knowledge is necessary for system management?
/16/ SICAM SAS Overview
/15/ SICAM SAS/RTU Planning and Design

Ordering Who can provide support on technical and handling questions?


Is my order complete and correct?
/15/ SICAM SAS/RTU Planning and Design

Assembling, Which safety measures are required?


mounting hardware
Which order and which rules must be observed for the mounting
components
procedure?
/13/ SICAM SAS Mounting Instructions

Installing the How do I proceed for installing?


software
Which details have to be observed when authorizing?
Which prerequisites must be given?
/17/ SICAM SAS, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS
/19/ SICAM SAS, Manual Human Machine Interface SICAM WinCC

Configuring / Which is the right order for configuring/parameterizing?


parameterizing
Where do I set which parameters?
How do I download my data to the PLC?
Which tools are available for a data test?
How can I document my data?
How do I archive data?
/16/ SICAM SAS Overview
/17/ SICAM SAS, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS
Online help system

ii SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Foreword

Configuring Where do I configure a control?


the control
Which functions are included as blocks in the scope of delivery?
How do I test and compile the configured control?
/18/ SICAM SAS, Manual SICAM plusTOOLS CFC Blocks
/17/ SICAM SAS, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS
/5/ SIMATIC S7, Manual CFC V5.0/V5.1
/1/ SIMATIC S7, STEP 7 Basic Knowledge
Online help system

Commissioning How do I avoid disturbances, accidents when commissioning my


system / during operation?
Which persons are able / authorized to operate my system?
/13/ SICAM SAS Mounting Instructions

Human Machine Which solutions are offered by the system?


Interface
How do I design my systems user interface?
How do I configure the interface to the Substation Controller?
/16/ SICAM SAS Overview
/19/ SICAM SAS, Manual Human Machine Interface SICAM WinCC
/20/ SICAM SAS, Manual Measured/Metered Value Processing Utility
SICAM Valpro
/22/ SICAM SAS, Manual Fault Record Processing Utility SICAM Recpro
/6/ SIMATIC WinCC Documentation V5.0
Online help system

Measured and Which functions are offered by the SICAM SAS system?
metered value
Which data volumes can be stored in which format?
archives
Which types of evaluation are possible?
/16/ SICAM SAS Overview
/19/ SICAM SAS, Manual Human Machine Interface SICAM WinCC
/20/ SICAM SAS, Manual Measured/Metered Value Processing Utility
SICAM Valpro
/6/ SIMATIC WinCC Documentation V5.0
Online help system

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual iii


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Foreword

Diagnostics / Does the system require any maintenance?


troubleshooting
What is the reason for a system fault indication, what is the appro-
priate remedy?
Where can I configure additional error messages?
/14/ SICAM SAS Maintenance and Diagnostics

Evaluation of fault Which functions are offered by the SICAM SAS system?
records
How do I configure the function?
Which types of evaluation are possible?
/22/ SICAM SAS, Manual Fault Record Processing Utility SICAM Recpro

iv SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Table of Contents

1 System Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1.2 The SICAM plusTOOLS Software Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.3 An overview of the hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2 Basic Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

2.1.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

2.1.2 Help system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.1.3 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.1.4 Control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.2 Icons and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.3 SIMATIC Manager in SICAM plusTOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2.3.1 Setting SIMATIC Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

2.4 Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

2.4.1 Creating a project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

2.4.2 Managing project lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

2.4.3 Rearranging projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

2.4.4 Copying projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

2.4.5 Converting project data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual v


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Table of Contents

2.5 SICAM SAS demo stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

2.5.1 Defining demo stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

2.5.2 Inserting demo stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

2.6 Data structure in SIMATIC Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

3 Installation and Deinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

3.1 Installation requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

3.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

3.2.1 SICAM plusTOOLS installation routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

3.2.2 Installing DIGSI V4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

3.2.3 Install DOCPRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

3.2.4 Borland C++ V5.01 Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

3.3 Deinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

3.4 Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

4 Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

4.2 Defining a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

4.3 Defining a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

4.4 Configuring the substation controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

4.4.1 Calling up Hardware Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

4.4.2 Inserting a module rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

4.4.3 Inserting modules general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

4.4.4 Inserting CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4.4.5 Inserting input/output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

vi SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Table of Contents

4.5 Basic parameterization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

4.5.1 General parameterization of modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

4.5.2 Basic modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

4.5.3 Communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

4.5.4 DI Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

4.5.5 CO module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

4.5.6 CR module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

4.5.7 AI-C module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

4.5.8 AI-V module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

4.5.9 IM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

4.5.10 Exit Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

4.6 Creating network nodes for PROFIBUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

4.7 Bay devices - connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.7.1 Inserting bay devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.7.2 Sorting SAS information items of the bay devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

4.7.3 Selecting the information volume of the bay devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

4.8 Structuring SAS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

4.9 Creating SAS information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

4.9.1 Creating SAS information for derived information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

4.9.2 Creating SAS information items for output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

4.10 Information distribution within the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

4.10.1 Assigning process feedback to a command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

4.10.2 Assigning a command to process feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

4.10.3 Assigning information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

4.10.4 Creating the SAS CFC variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual vii


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Table of Contents

4.11 Parameterizing CFC Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

4.11.1 Importing SICAM CFC blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

4.11.2 Configuring tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

4.11.3 Defining the standard priority class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

4.11.4 Parameterize the indication block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

4.11.5 Parameterizing a command block (with command release). . . . . . . . . . . . 121

4.11.6 Parameterizing the command block (without command release). . . . . . . . 125

4.12 Configuring a control center connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

4.12.1 Configuring control center IEC in the control direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

4.12.2 Parameterizing control center IEC in the monitoring direction . . . . . . . . . . 130

4.13 Telecontrol lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

4.13.1 Assigning information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

4.14 Completing configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

4.15 Compiling data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

5 Substation Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

5.1 General Information on Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

5.2 General information about hardware parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

5.3 Operating functions of the Hardware Configuration application . . . . . . . . . 146

5.4 Hardware Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

5.4.1 Inserting modules general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

5.4.2 Selecting hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

5.4.3 Parameterizing hardware components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

5.5 Parameterizing the CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

viii SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Table of Contents

5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

5.6.1 Time Parameters tab card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

5.6.2 Basic Parameters tab card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

5.6.3 Protocols tab card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

5.6.4 Ports tab card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

5.7 Parameterizing a PROFIBUS FMS connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

5.8 Parameterizing a PROFIBUS DP connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

5.9 Parameterizing a DI module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

5.10 Parameterizing a CO module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

5.11 Parameterizing a CR module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

5.12 Parameterizing AI modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

5.13 Parameterizing interface modules IM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

5.14 Saving and compiling the hardware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

6 Bay Device / Substation Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

6.2 Inserting bay devices from the catalog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

6.3 Bay device properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

6.4 SIPROTEC 4 devices with a PROFIBUS FMS interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

6.4.1 Inserting and parameterizing a SIPROTEC 4 device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

6.4.2 Inserting an externally parameterized SIPROTEC 4 device . . . . . . . . . . . 225

6.4.3 Parameterizing a SIPROTEC 4 device externally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

6.4.4 Transfer the DIGSI 4 project to the SICAM plusTOOLS project . . . . . . . . 227

6.5 Display sorted SAS information of the bay devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

6.6 Selecting the information volume of bay devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

6.7 Copying Bay Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual ix


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Table of Contents

6.8 Bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

6.8.1 Inserting a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

6.8.2 Creating information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

6.8.3 CFC block, parameterizing SIMEAS Q. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

6.9 Substation connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

6.9.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

6.9.2 Inserting a substation connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

6.9.3 Connection in the control direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

6.9.4 Connection in the monitoring direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

6.9.5 Address structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

7 Control Center Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

7.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

7.2 Control center connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

7.3 Address structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

7.4 Connection in the control direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

7.5 Connection in the monitoring direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

7.6 Telecontrol lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

7.6.1 List types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

7.6.2 Inserting lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

7.6.3 Assigning information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

8 Information Routing and Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

8.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

8.1.1 SIM Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

8.1.2 SIMTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

8.1.3 MIM Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

8.2 Structuring SAS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

x SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Table of Contents

8.3 Changing the source or target of SAS information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

8.4 Renaming SAS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

8.5 Deleting SAS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

8.6 Selecting SAS information for COM TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

8.7 Selecting SAS information for SICAM WinCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

8.8 Configuring CFC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

8.8.1 Parameterizing CFC blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

8.8.2 Importing SICAM CFC blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

8.8.3 Configuring tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

8.8.4 Defining the standard priority class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

8.8.5 Parameterizing a CFC block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

9 Information Processing

in the Monitoring Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

9.2 Creating SAS information in the SIM Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

9.2.1 Creating SAS Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

9.2.2 Linking SAS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

9.3 Creating SAS information in the MIM Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

9.3.1 Creating connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

9.3.2 Defining connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

9.3.3 Creating and linking SAS information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

9.4 Disconnecting links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

9.4.1 Application example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

9.5 Selecting SAS information for COM TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

9.6 Selecting SAS information for SICAM WinCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual xi


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Table of Contents

9.7 Configuring CFC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

9.7.1 Creating a CFC variable for module outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

9.7.2 Creating a CFC variable for module inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

9.8 Parameterizing CFC indication blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

10 Information Processing

in the Control Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

10.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

10.2 Creating SAS Information in the SIM Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

10.2.1 Creating SAS Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

10.2.2 Linking SAS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

10.3 Creating SAS information in the MIM Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

10.3.1 Creating connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

10.3.2 Defining connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

10.3.3 Creating and linking SAS information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

10.4 Disconnecting links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

10.5 Selecting SAS information for COM TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

10.6 Selecting SAS information for SICAM WinCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

10.7 Command assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

10.7.1 Assigning process feedback to a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

10.7.2 Assigning a command to process feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

10.7.3 Activating the Command Release Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

10.8 Configuring CFC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

10.8.1 Creating CFC variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

10.9 Parameterizing CFC command blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

10.9.1 Command Block with Command Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

10.9.2 Parameterizing the command block (without command release). . . . . . . . 342

xii SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Table of Contents

11 Downloading the Project Data

to the Target System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

11.1 Compiling data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

11.1.1 Compiling the Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

11.1.2 Compiling in SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

11.1.3 Creating system data blocks for PROFIBUS FMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

11.1.4 Compiling in CFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

11.2 SICAM Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

11.3 Downloading to the target system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

11.3.1 Downloading the hardware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

11.3.2 Downloading the M7 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

11.3.3 Downloading MCP firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

11.3.4 Downloading MCP configuration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

11.3.5 Downloading CP configuration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

11.4 Operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

12 Archiving / Project Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

12.1 Archiving project data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

12.2 Retrieving project data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

12.3 Project documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

12.3.1 Print objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

12.3.2 Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual xiii


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Table of Contents

A Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

A.1 Data types of the SICAM SAS process data structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

References

Glossary

Index

xiv SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
System Overview 1
Contents 1.1 General 2

1.2 The SICAM plusTOOLS Software Package 3

1.3 An overview of the hardware 5

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 1


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
1 System Overview

1.1 General

Overview SICAM plusTOOLS is a versatile and powerful system solution that will
assist you with configuration and parameterization of SICAM SAS
(SICAM Substation Automation System).
SICAM SAS is an open substation automation system of modular design
that combines specific telecontrol functions with the versatility of a PLC-
based automation system.
This system is based on SICAM Substation Controller SC, which builds
on the automation system SIMATIC M7.
SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS is based on the Microsoft Windows
operating system. Thus, as a user, you are dealing with a known system
environment. You can rely on the already familiar and convenient
functionality of Windows technology.

SICAM plusTOOLS allows you to proceed flexibly when configuring and


parameterizing a station, while at the same time providing consequent
user guidance.
G Plausibility checks allow only operations and combinations that are
permissible in the specific context.
G Permissible input variables are displayed in drop-down lists or scroll
boxes.
G The drag-and-drop function makes it easy to group, separate, or
move data.
G Copy functions on different levels optimize the configuration
procedure.
G Help texts which are organized according to topics explain the
configuration.
G Context-sensitive help texts explain the text boxes and the
permissible input variables.

2 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
1.2 The SICAM plusTOOLS Software Package

1.2 The SICAM plusTOOLS Software Package

The SICAM plusTOOLS configuration system is divided into individual,


function-specific applications.

SIMATIC Manager SIMATIC Manager is the platform of SICAM plusTOOLS. Using


SIMATIC Manager, you define and manage your project and call the
applications.
The project structure is created automatically during configuration. The
data areas are organized in separate containers. In the navigation pane
of the SIMATIC Manager, the project structure is displayed like the
Windows folder structure. Each container corresponds to a folder on the
respective level of the hierarchy.

HW Configuration The HW configuration (hardware configuration) application lets you


configure the modules of SICAM SC and their parameters. The
configuration is shown as a table on the screen. You can choose the
components from a Hardware Catalog and put them into the
hardware configuration window using drag-and-drop or by double-
clicking. The tab cards for parameterizing the modules are already filled
with default values, which you can alter.
In addition, you can configure and parameterize your bay devices with
PROFIBUS-DP interfaces and define the interfaces for connecting
substations.

COM IED The COM IED (Communication to Intelligent Electronic Devices)


application lets you configure the connection of bay devices in control
and monitoring direction.
The bay device that can be connected using protocols IEC60870-5-103,
PROFIBUS FMS, and DNP V3.00 are stored in a catalog.
The bay devices are imported from the catalog into COM IED with their
maximum information volume by drag-and-drop. You can then simply
reduce the volume of information.
You can also configure connection of your substations in the control
and monitoring directions in the COM IED. You can connect all
substations that can communicate with your SICAM SC using the
IEC 60870-5-101 protocol. These include not only the SICAM products
RTU, mini RTU, micro RTU, and SINAUT LSA, but also substations of
other manufactures and lower-level SICAM SCs. The substation
connections are inserted using the COM IED catalog.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 3


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
1 System Overview

COM TC The COM TC application manages all parameters relevant to information


exchange with higher-level control centers. The telegrams are configured
separately for the control and monitoring directions.
For the transmission of the telegrams in the monitoring direction, these
are assigned to priority-specific and type-specific lists. The list types are
provided in a Telecontrol List Catalog and are copied into COM TC by
drag-and-drop.

SIM The SIM application (SICAM Information Manager) manages the


SAS information items of the system and consists of the following:
G SIM Table
G MIM Table
G Station identification

SIM Table The SIM Table is used to configure the distribution of the
SAS information items within the system. To do that, you can specify the
source and target of the SAS information items or change automatically
preset values.

MIM Table The MIM table enables assignment of information items stored directly in
SICAM SC to SAS information items.

Station The station identification container contains all status information items
identification of the SICAM SC modules, the bay devices, and the communication links
of a station.

SIM Browser The SIM Browser is used to structure and organize the SAS information
items in user-specific hierarchies (folder structures). It also enables you
to create and manage SAS information items.

The other system components


G SICAM WinCC (human-machine interface),
G SICAM Recpro (fault recording evaluation) and
G SICAM CFC (automation tasks)
of the SICAM SAS substation automation system access the data
configured using SICAM plusTOOLS.

You can use data from SIPROTEC units that you have configured and
parameterized using DIGSI 4 directly in SICAM plusTOOLS.

4 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
1.3 An overview of the hardware

1.3 An overview of the hardware

System expansion The SICAM substation controller (SICAM SC) consists of a central rack
and up to 6 expansion racks for a maximum of 95 input/output modules
or 6 MCP assemblies.

Central With a maximum of 95 input/output modules, you can parameterize up to


information points 3040 central information points as:
G Single-point indication
G Fleeting indication
G Double-point indication
G Bit pattern indication
G Transformer tap indication
G Metered value capturing
G Measured value capturing
G Single command
G Double command
G Digital setpoint value
G Analog setpoint value
G Metered value restore (freeze) command

Distributed To connect bay devices and substations, you have the following options:
information points
G Up to 96 bay devices via a maximum of 4 PROFIBUS FMS interfaces
with CP modules
G Up to 96 bay devices / substations via a maximum of 4 MCP
assemblies
G Bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface via an interface module of
the CPU module. The information volume of these devices is entered
linearly in the process image PII. The number of devices that can be
connected is therefore limited by the PII.
Overall, up to 10,000 distributed information points can be
parameterized.

Control centers Via 2 MCP assemblies, you can communicate with up to 3 higher-level
control centers.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 5


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
1 System Overview

Note:
Central and distributed information points can be combined in one
configuration. The number of possible information points is determined
by the expansion of the substation controller (central rack with maximum
6 expansion racks), the number and expansion of the configured
communication modules, the input/output modules, the size of the
process image, and the performance of the system.

For further information, please refer to


G SICAM SAS Technical Description /12/ and
G SICAM SAS/RTU Planning and Design /15/.

The SICAM substation controller can be fitted with the modules listed
below.
The basic modules must be installed, all others are configured,
depending on the concept and expansion of your SICAM SAS substation
automation system.

Basic G PS power supply module (central and expansion racks)


modules
G CPU module (central rack only)

IM interface G IM interface modules for connecting expansion racks to the central


modules rack.

Communication G MCP assembly, consisting of:


modules
the MCP communications processor and
up to 4 XF6 and/or XC2 expansion modules.
G CP 443-5 Basic as a PROFIBUS FMS interface
G interface module IF 964 as a PROFIBUS DP interface
G CP 1401 for TCP/IP interface SICAM WinCC
G CP 443-5 for industrial Ethernet interface SICAM WinCC

Input/output G DI digital input module


modules
G AI analog input module
G CO command output module
G CR command release module
G SIMATIC Standard I/O modules

6 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
1.3 An overview of the hardware

Typical configuration of a SICAM SAS substation automation system


with SC substation controller and bay devices.

Control center/node

DCF77 e.g. IEC 60870-5-101


1

s
PS 20A
DC 48/20
2

INTF

BATT1F
3
CPU
X
488-3
0XX0000-0XX00
CP xxx
6ES7

INTF
EXTF
SD
HD
CP 443-5 MCP
X X3
45 X
443-5FX00-0XE0
X2
XC2
0XX0000-0XX00
34 X
CP xxx 6MD1010-0BA00
41x-1XJ00-0AB0

INTF
EXTF
X2
MCP
34 X
CP xxx &MD1010-0BA00
CP xxx

INTF
EXTF
LOAD
P
X2
34 X
XF6
0XX0000-0XX00
6MD1010-0BA00
X2
XF6
0XX0000-0XX00
34 X
CP xxx 6MD1010-0BA20

INTF
EXTF
LOAD
FAULT1 FAULT1 FAULT1
P
CP xxx
X2
CR
0XX0000-0XX00
34 X X2
34
6MD1023-0AA00
6MD1010-0BA20
P
CP xxx P P

SICAM SC
USR1 TXD1 TXD1 TXD1
BATT2F
BAF
DC5V
DC24V
USR2

RUN RUN
RXD1
FAULT2
TXD2
RXD2
RUN
RXD1

TXD2
RXD2
RXD1
FAULT2
FAULT2 TXD2
RXD2
RUN T1 T1
Substation contro
SICAM WinCC SICAM plusTOOLS FMR
STOP

RUN
STOP
RUN
STOP
STOP

RESET
STOP
R1
RESET R1

RUN-PSTOP

Human-Machine Configuration RUN

STOP
MRES
T2

R2
T2

R2

Interface (HMI), BATT


1 BATT
2 SYNC SYNC T3 T3

Archive R3

T4
R3

T4

R4 R4

X1 X1 X1
2BATT T5 T5
OFF
1BATT
R5 R5

T6 T6
X1
L+ EXT.-BATT.
PROFIBUS

SIMATIC NET L- R6 R6
X2 X2 X2
PE
5...15V DC

Substation SIPROTEC 4 devices 6MB525 with Protection units with IEC 60870-5-10
via PROFIBUS FMS IEC 60870-5-103 (optical fiber cable)
(copper cable)
SUC145.cdr

Pic. 1-1 Substation automation system SICAM SAS, configuration example

Note:
The configuration example in Kapitel 4, Getting Started is based on this
configuration example. The example is supplemented by a
PROFIBUS FMS interface.
Further configuration options are explained in the SICAM SAS Technical
Description /12/.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 7


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
1 System Overview

Configuration rules The following rules must be complied with in the


SICAM SC hardware configuration of a SICAM SC:
G A SICAM SC consists of a central rack and up to 6 expansion racks.
G As a standard, UR1 module racks with 18 slots are provided.
Optionally, the UR2 rack with 9 slots is available.
G The PS power supply module from the SICAM 400/PS folder must be
inserted in slot 1 in the central rack and each expansion rack.
The PS module has a width of 3 slots.
G SICAM SC can only be equipped with one CPU. It must be inserted
next to the PS in the central rack. The CPU occupies 2 slots.
G SICAM SC can be equipped with a maximum of 6 MCP assemblies.
Depending on the number of expansion modules, an MCP assembly
occupies 1 to 5 slots.
G Communication modules CP 443-5 must only be inserted in the
central rack.
G To configure CO modules with command release, a CR module must
be inserted.
G To output 32-bit commands, 2 CO modules (for 16 bits each) must
be inserted directly side by side.
G The interface modules IM are only required if expansion racks are
configured.
More than one send interface module can be plugged into the central
rack, starting from the last slot of the rack. The different subtypes of
send interface modules must always be combined with matching
subtypes of receive interface modules
(e.g. IM 460-0 with IM 461-0).
An expansion rack must not contain more than one receive interface
module, which must be plugged into the last slot.
Each IM has two connection interfaces, allowing star connections or
cascade connections.

8 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
1.3 An overview of the hardware

Interfaces G The MCP communications processor and the expansion module XC2
in the MCP assembly are each equipped with two serial interfaces
that are used for connecting SICAM SC to higher-level control
centers or for the connection of bay devices / substations. They
can be parameterized as an RS232 or RS485 interface.
The X21 interface is operated in the same way as the RS485.
If you are using an RS232 interface with TCP/IP, you require an
additional LAN / WAN converter.
G The XF6 expansion module of the MCP assembly has 6 fiber optic
cable (FO) interfaces for connecting bay devices.
G The MCP communications processor has an interface for external
time signal reception (DCF77 or GPS).
G The CPU is equipped with one MPI interface for connection of
external devices (programming device, PC, etc.).
G The CP 443-5 Basic module enables connection of bay devices
through PROFIBUS FMS.
G The interface module IF964 enables connection of bay devices
with the PROFIBUS DP interface.

Protocols The MCP communications processor processes the data of the external
interfaces through six internal channels.
If required, the following protocols can be parameterized for these
channels:
G IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC), up to 57.6 Kbps, X21
G TCP/IP (for IEC 60870-5-104), up to 115.2 Kbps or X21
(only channels 1 to 4)
G SINAUT 8-FW (COM TC),
up to 1200 bps for PDM, up to 38.4 Kbps for PCM
(only channels 1 to 4)
G DNP V3.0 (COM TC), up to 38.4 Kbps
G TELEGYR 800 (COM TC), up to 38.4 Kbps
G IEC 60870-5-101 (COM IED), up to 57.6 Kbps, X21
G IEC 60870-5-103 (COM IED), 9.2 Kbps and 19.2 Kbps
G DNP V3.0 (COM IED), 9.6 Kbps and 19.2 Kbps

Note:
You will find detailed information about the function and technical data of
the modules of the SICAM substation controller in the manual
SICAM SAS Technical Description /12/.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 9


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
1 System Overview

10 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Basic Operating Instructions 2
Overview SICAM plusTOOLS is system software that runs under the operating
system Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0 with Service Pack 6
and makes use of the window technique of these operating systems. To
work with SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS, you will need some basic
knowledge about Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0.
This chapter provides additional operating instructions for
SICAM plusTOOLS.

Contents 2.1 General 12

2.2 Icons and symbols 19

2.3 SIMATIC Manager in SICAM plusTOOLS 25

2.4 Projects 30

2.5 SICAM SAS demo stations 35

2.6 Data structure in SIMATIC Manager 37

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 11


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2 Basic Operating Instructions

2.1 General

2.1.1 Functions

SICAM plusTOOLS is a software package for configuring and


parameterizing the SICAM SAS substation automation system.
SICAM plusTOOLS comprises SIMATIC Manager and the applications:
G Hardware Configuration for configuring the hardware of SICAM SC
and the bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface
G COM IED, for configuring bay device connections
G SIM, for information routing and distribution
G MIM, for managing the information of SICAM SC
G COM TC, for configuring the control center connections
G CFC, for configuring automation functions

SICAM plusTOOLS supports and monitors the inputs of the user by


consequent user guidance and numerous plausibility checks. These
include:
G Context menus for switching quickly between the different levels of
control.
G Immediate check of the range of values and of the data type during
input.
The permissible values appear in a selection box from where they are
transferred.
G Dialog monitoring
The data of a project can be called from several applications
simultaneously. However, SICAM plusTOOLS only ever grants write
access to one application, all others being granted read access only.
That ensures that changes are made in a defined way in one
application. All other applications are automatically updated after the
changes have been saved.
G Consistency checks during compilation of the input data. Data that are
not plausible are highlighted in red. SAS information must be
interconnected with at least one system component (e.g. HMI, TCC,
CFC).
G Compatibility key for SICAM SC and SIPROTEC devices ensure that
the configured data are only executable on the associated hardware.
Otherwise fault indications are output during hardware startup and
startup is interrupted.
G Additional compatibility keys check data consistency between
SICAM plusTOOLS and SICAM WinCC.
In the case of data inconsistencies, fault indications are output during
startup of the SICAM WinCC System and startup is aborted.

12 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2.1 General

2.1.2 Help system

SICAM plusTOOLS and SIMATIC Manager have a comprehensive Help


system:
G General Help can be called from any program level by clicking on the
Help menu. You can then ask for information structured according to
topics.
G Context-sensitive Help is available for all dialog boxes and text
boxes. You can activate the context-sensitive Help by clicking the ?
button on the toolbar. The mouse pointer becomes a question mark.
Move the question mark to any desired point within the active dialog
box or to a text box. Clicking the left mouse button calls up the topic-
related quick information.
By pressing the F1 key, you can call up help information about the
active window.

2.1.3 User interface

Tab cards Dialog boxes are divided up according to different topics to enhance
clarity. These topics are represented by tab cards.
Click on the tab of a tab card to switch between the tab cards of a
dialog box.

Group box The content of tab cards is divided into group boxes. The different group
boxes are also surrounded by a border to make the grouping immediately
apparent.

Check boxes Check boxes are used to enable or disable optional functions. On screen,
check boxes appear as rectangles that contain a checkmark (cross)
when enabled.
Click on an empty check box to enable the function.
Click on a check box with a checkmark to disable the function.

Option buttons The standard parameterization can be extended or reduced by optional


functions. You can make the text boxes (option buttons) that are
necessary for that purpose available by activating the corresponding
check boxes.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 13


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2 Basic Operating Instructions

Buttons Using buttons, the user can call additional dialog boxes or enable certain
functions. The buttons either have self-explanatory labels or are
represented by clear symbols and are enabled by clicking. Once the
corresponding operation has terminated, you will automatically return to
the original dialog box.
Click on the button (for example, Parameterization).
The subsequent function is called.

Drop-down Drop-down lists are linked to text boxes that can only be assigned preset
lists values. Proceed as follows:
Click on the text box with the mouse pointer.
The drop-down list opens.
Select the desired variable. The chosen variable is written into the text
box.

Drop-down A drop-down combo box combines the characteristics of a text box with
combo box those of a drop-down list box. You can either enter data manually or
select them from a drop-down list.

Spin box Spin boxes are text boxes where you can either enter values manually or
increase or decrease the displayed values by predefined increments.
Click on the up arrow to increase the value.
Click on the down arrow to decrease the value.

Selection boxes You can use selection boxes to enter preset data in the individual cells of
assignment tables. Proceed as follows:
Move the mouse pointer to the table cell you want to edit.
Press the right mouse button. A context-sensitive list appears.
Click on the variable you require.

Catalogs In configuring your hardware you are supported by:


G the Hardware Catalog for selecting the modules of the SICAM SC
G the Bay Device Catalog for selecting the connectable bay devices
G the Telecontrol Catalog for selecting the telecontrol lists to which the
information in the monitoring direction is to be assigned.
When you insert individual components by drag-and-drop, the
parameters from the corresponding database will be imported into your
project.

14 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2.1 General

Off-line / on-line SIMATIC Manager can be operated either in the off-line view (standard
view setting) or on-line.
Select the mode you want using the View menu.
The off-line view is used to configure and parameterize and download
data to the target system.
The on-line view allows you to perform a functional and data test.

2.1.4 Control functions

Context menu In SICAM plusTOOLS, the user is often guided by context menus. They
are used for opening containers, starting applications, defining object
properties, linking information, etc.
Proceed as follows:
Move the mouse pointer to the object you want to edit.
Press the right mouse button. The associated context menu appears.
Click on the operation you want to be performed.

SAS 201.gif

Pic. 2-1 Example of a context menu

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 15


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2 Basic Operating Instructions

Opening / closing (Data) containers can be opened both from the navigation pane and from
(data) containers the data pane. Proceed as follows:
Double-click on the symbol of the container in the navigation pane.
The hierarchical levels of the container are represented in the
navigation pane, while its contents are displayed in the data pane.
Double-click on the symbol of a container in the data pane to open it.

Applications SICAM plusTOOLS applications can be called from the data pane of
Calling SIMATIC Manager as follows:
applications from
Select the application in the data pane, press the right mouse button,
SIMATIC Manager
and open it by choosing Open Object from the context menu.

Calling up Select the menu command Options SICAM Information


SIM Browser Browser in the applications SIM, MIM, COM TC, COM IED, or in
SIMATIC Manager.

Calling up From the application SIM, open the SIM Browser, the application MIM,
applications from the application COM IED, the COM TC, and the status table, as follows:
SIM
Select MIM in the Source column of the SIM Table and open the
MIM Table using the context menu.
Select COM IED in the Source column of the SIM Table and open the
COM IED application using the context menu.
Double-click on an entry in the SIM Table in column TCCx. The
COM TC is opened.
Double-click on entry RTC-IED or RTC-IO in the SIM Table, tab card
Status information. The status table is opened.

16 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2.1 General

Drag-and-drop Using the drag-and-drop function, you can group objects from different
function data areas quickly and reliably.
By drag and drop, you can:
G copy data areas (e.g. from catalogs)
G move data areas (e.g. when generating your station topology in the
SIM Browser).
Proceed as follows:
Select an object.
Place the mouse pointer on the selected object.
Press the left mouse button and hold it pressed.
Drag the mouse pointer into the target window to the desired position
and release the mouse button.
In the target window, a copy of the data area is inserted, or the data area
is moved to the selected position. During this operation, application-
specific plausibility checks are performed.

Copy functions Copy functions make configuration and parameterization easier.


You can define models for:
G Projects
G Stations
G input/output modules,
G MCP assemblies,
G Bay devices
G substations
and copy them using Copy in the context menu.
The model parameterization is taken over completely during copying and
is adapted automatically, if necessary. For example, when copying
modules or MCP assemblies, the new slot addresses are entered and
new hierarchical names of SAS information are formed.
Adapt the parameters of the copied object.
For example, configure the connection of the copied bay device to an
MCP assembly or the transmission protocols of the communication
links.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 17


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2 Basic Operating Instructions

Multiple selection For different control functions (e.g. the delete function), multiple selection
of information is possible.
Select the first information item (e.g. an SAS information item in the
SIM Browser).
To select more than one information item, press and hold CTRL and
successively click the information items required
or
to select multiple sequential items of information, press and hold
SHIFT and click the last item of information of the area.
Perform the control function (e.g. deleting using the context menu) for
all selected information items.

Links To link data manually (e.g. when you have created an SAS information),
proceed as follows:
Select an information item.
Select Link to... from the context menu.
The shortcut icon of Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0 is attached to the
mouse pointer.
Double-click on the linked information.
The shortcut icon disappears from the mouse pointer.
Press the ESC key, if you want to cancel the shortcut function.

Transferring table Using the standard Windows functions Copy and Paste, you can also
contents transfer table contents from SICAM plusTOOLS applications to EXCEL
to an EXCEL file files. That way, your parameterization data are available for further
internal evaluation, for example, user-orientated documentation
procedures.
The copying function to EXCEL is also used to transfer data from
substations to the COM IED. If the substation is a SICAM product, e.g. a
SICAM RTU, you can copy information items of the substation directly
from the COM TC of the substation to the COM IED of the SICAM SC.

18 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2.2 Icons and symbols

2.2 Icons and symbols

The following is a list of all the icons and symbols of SICAM plusTOOLS
together with their functionality.

Table 2-1 Icons of SICAM plusTOOLS

Icon Function/meaning

Creates a new project.

Opens an existing project.

Opens a window containing the accessible stations of the


MPI interface (CPU).

Deletes the selected objects and puts them into the Clipboard.

Copies the selected objects to the Clipboard.

Pastes objects from the Clipboard.

Switches to the on-line view.

Switches to the off-line view.

Displays the objects with large icons.

Displays the objects with small icons.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 19


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2 Basic Operating Instructions

Table 2-1 Icons of SICAM plusTOOLS

Icon Function/meaning

Displays a list of the objects.

Displays a list with details of the objects.

Symbol for the Hardware Configuration application

Symbol for the CPU

Symbol for the COM IED application (Communication to


Intelligent Electronic Devices), bay device connection.

Symbol for the SIM application (SICAM Information Manager).

Symbol for MIM (Module Information Manager)

Symbol for the COM TC application (Communication to


Telecontrol Centers), connection to control centers.

Symbol for the MCP assembly container.

Station identification

Global title block

20 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2.2 Icons and symbols

Table 2-1 Icons of SICAM plusTOOLS

Icon Function/meaning

Documentation on Docpro

Symbol for the Station container.

Symbol for networking using MPI or PROFIBUS.

Symbol for the Project container.

Opens the on-line and off-line partners of the active station.

Saves (and compiles) the system data.

Prints the active station or parts of it.

Downloads the active station to the memory of the active


module.

Loads the current station to the programming device, i.e. to the


selected project on the PG/PC.

Opens the Hardware Catalog or the Telecontrol List Catalog.

Symbol for the CFC blocks container.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 21


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2 Basic Operating Instructions

Table 2-1 Icons of SICAM plusTOOLS

Icon Function/meaning

Symbol for the CFC charts container.

Symbol for Data Blocks.

Symbol for the CFC chart.

Opens the SICAM Information Browser.

Opens the catalog of bay devices / substation connections.

Symbol for control center connection.

Symbol for substation connection.

Address structure in the COM TC.

Symbol for the Control Direction Telegrams container.

Symbol for Control Direction.

Symbol for Monitoring Direction.

22 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2.2 Icons and symbols

Table 2-1 Icons of SICAM plusTOOLS

Icon Function/meaning

Symbol for Telegrams in Monitoring Direction.

Symbol for Telecontrol Lists.

Expand COM IED

Opens the CFC dialog mask Compile for target system.

Opens the SICAM Report.

Activates context-sensitive context-sensitive Help.

Changes the connection partner for the active connections.

Inserts a new connection into the Connection Table.

Opens and closes the CFC Block Catalog.

Switches between test and configuration mode.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 23


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2 Basic Operating Instructions

Table 2-1 Icons of SICAM plusTOOLS

Icon Function/meaning

CFC reference data for current program.

CFC, current chart in Overview.

CFC, current chart in previously set Sheet view.

24 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2.3 SIMATIC Manager in SICAM plusTOOLS

2.3 SIMATIC Manager in SICAM plusTOOLS

SIMATIC Manager is started from the Windows user interface as


follows:
Click on the Start button on the Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0
taskbar and select SICAM from the start menu.

sas600.gif

Pic. 2-2 Starting SIMATIC Manager

Move the cursor to plusTOOLS SIMATIC Manager and press the


left mouse button.
The start window of SIMATIC Manager opens.

SAS108.gif

Pic. 2-3 Start window of SIMATIC Manager

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 25


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2 Basic Operating Instructions

2.3.1 Setting SIMATIC Manager

The basic settings of SIMATIC Manager can be adjusted to suit user


requirements. Select Options Customize.
The Customize dialog box opens. It offers four tab cards:
G Language
G General
G Columns
G View
G Archive

Tab cards This window is used to set the language and the mnemonics. Proceed as
Language follows:
Click on the Language tab card.
Select the language in which you want to work.
All installed languages are displayed in the list.
Select the SIMATIC mnemonics.
Confirm your settings with OK.

sas100.gif

Pic. 2-4 Customize dialog box, Language tab card

26 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2.3 SIMATIC Manager in SICAM plusTOOLS

Tab cards This tab card allows you to choose your working folders. When you save
General your projects or libraries, SIMATIC Manager automatically opens the
folders entered here.
Proceed as follows:
Click on the General tab card.
Enter the complete path of the working folder in the Storage
Location for Projects or Storage Location for Libraries text box or
select the folder you want using the relevant Browse button.
Enable or disable the required options.
Confirm your settings with OK.

sas101.gif

Pic. 2-5 Customize, General tab card

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 27


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2 Basic Operating Instructions

Tab cards This tab card allows you to set the various view options of a project in
View SIMATIC Manager.
Proceed as follows:
Click on the View tab card.
Enable or disable the required options.
Confirm your settings with OK.

sas1000.gif

Pic. 2-6 Customize, View tab card

Settings The Columns tab card allows you to specify object by object which
Columns columns are to be visible.

sas102a.gif

Pic. 2-7 Settings, Columns tab card

28 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2.3 SIMATIC Manager in SICAM plusTOOLS

Tab cards This tab card allows you to configure the archiving program. Proceed as
Archive follows:
Select the WinZip archiving program from the drop-down list.
Activate or deactivate other options in the Options box.
Decide whether you want to use the default folders or select another
folder using the Browse... button.
Open the configuration window using the Configuring... button.
Enter the complete path of the archive program or select a path using
the Browse... button.
Activate or deactivate other options in the Options box.
Confirm your settings with OK. This closes the Configure - Archive
window.
Confirm your settings with OK.

sas102.gif

Pic. 2-8 Customize, Archiving tab card

Note:
The only compression program permitted with SICAM plusTOOLS is the
compression program WinZip! WinZip is included in the scope of
delivery.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 29


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2 Basic Operating Instructions

2.4 Projects

2.4.1 Creating a project

When creating projects, SIMATIC Manager first creates a project folder


in which all the project-specific files and subfolders are stored.
Select File New. The New dialog box appears offering a list of
projects already included in the project list.

SAS001.gif

Pic. 2-9 Creating a new project

Select New Project.


Enter a unique project name in the Name text box, e.g. DemoCity.
Select Project from the Type drop-down list.
Check the folder set in the Storage Location (Path) dialog box and
use the Browse... button to select another folder if required. The
default setting is your working folder, e.g. S7proj (siehe
Kapitel 2.3.1).
Confirm your input with OK.

Note
Folder names must not exceed a maximum of 8 characters.

30 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2.4 Projects

The following project window opens:

SAS002.gif

Pic. 2-10 Project window of a new project

The navigation pane of the project window contains an icon for the
project and the Devices folder. As well as the Devices folder, the data
pane also displays the objects Global Title Block, Documentation, and
MPI(1). The folder and the objects are automatically generated when
creating a project.
MPI(1) is the interface for connecting external devices to the SICAM SC,
e.g. a parameterizing device (PG or PC).
In Global Title Block you can define protocol formats for the station
documentation.
In the Documentation application, you can log the station configuration
using the optional system component
Docpro.
The Devices folder is for inserting the protection units into the project.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 31


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2 Basic Operating Instructions

2.4.2 Managing project lists

All data that belong to a project are stored in a project folder, which is
divided into subfolders. This data structure ensures consistent data
management and archiving. All projects are managed in the project list.
The contents of the project list can be processed manually, i.e. the last
project processed is automatically entered in the list. If a project has not
been called up for some time, you might find it has been removed from
the list.
To edit the entries in the project list, proceed as follows:
Select the File Manage function from the menu bar.
The Manage dialog box appears.
Select a project and click on the Hide button if you want to remove the
project from the list.
Click the Display button if you want a project folder to reappear. The
Browse dialog box appears first.
Locate the appropriate project folder, select it, and confirm with OK.
The project folder opens.
Select the project file <project name> and confirm with OK. The
project is re-included in the project list.

2.4.3 Rearranging projects

When editing projects, you can delete, modify, or subsequently add


objects. To maintain data consistency after such modifications, you can
subsequently rearrange your project folder in SIMATIC Manager:
Select the File Rearrange function. The Rearrange dialog box
appears.
Select the corresponding project and confirm with OK.
The project data are rearranged.
If the project is not included in the displayed project list, proceed as
follows:
Press the Browse button. The Browse dialog box appears.
Locate the project folder, select it, and confirm with OK. The project
folder appears.
Open the project folder, select the project file <project name>, and
confirm with OK.
The project is rearranged.

32 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2.4 Projects

2.4.4 Copying projects

To speed things up when working with SICAM plusTOOLS, you can


parameterize sample projects, which you then simply copy.
Proceed as follows:
Open a project and select File Save As....
Enter a new project name and confirm with OK. The system
generates a folder bearing the new project name and copies the
project data to it.

Note:
When copying a whole project, no consistency checks are performed.

Note:
Please note that the name of the project file always corresponds to the
name of the original project, i.e. a change of name in SIMATIC Manager
is not automatically updated at the DOS/Windows level.

Customize the individual objects of the new project.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 33


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2 Basic Operating Instructions

2.4.5 Converting project data

If the data of your projects has been acquired with a SICAM plusTOOLS
version V4.0, the data can be converted and further processed.
Open Station within the project.
The converter is started and provides information on the type and scope
of any changes made.

sas500.gif

Pic. 2-11 Converting projects

The conversion procedure is logged in the SICAM Report.

On completion of conversion procedures, the project can be edited with


SICAM plusTOOLS V4.0.

Note:
Depending on the parameterization of the projects, new SAS information
items are created during conversion of the project data. These are not
linked and will cause fault indications during the plausibility check during
compilation. The SAS information items are highlighted in red in the SIM
Table. Link these data and repeat compilation (siehe Kapitel 11.1.2).

34 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2.5 SICAM SAS demo stations

2.5 SICAM SAS demo stations

You can use hardware templates to define SICAM SAS demo stations.
These can be used more than once in projects.
The advantage of the sample stations is that the project data are stored
in Catalog S7 and comments are displayed when the data is entered, in
a similar way to the catalogs of the hardware components.
Generally speaking, the data of the projects that are stored in folder
S7Proj can also be copied. However, in this case the comment function
is not available.

2.5.1 Defining demo stations

To define a SICAM SAS demo station:


Create a project with the desired SICAM SAS demo station in the
S7Libs folder.
Ensure that both the name of the project and that of the SICAM SAS
station are unique.
Parameterize the project or the SICAM SAS station to meet your
requirements.
Mark the project name in the navigation window of the
SIMATIC Manager.
Click on Edit Object Properties.... The Properties - Project
window appears.
Enter the name SICAM Example in the Comment text box.

SAS1022.gif

Pic. 2-12 Properties - Project dialog box

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 35


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2 Basic Operating Instructions

2.5.2 Inserting demo stations

To insert a SICAM SAS demo station:


Open the project in which you want to insert a SICAM SAS demo
station.
Mark the project name in the navigation window of the
SIMATIC Manager.
Click on Insert Station SICAM SAS. The dialog box Select a
station type is displayed.
Select the SICAM SAS demo station you want.

SAS1023.gif

Pic. 2-13 Dialog box Select a station type

Click on OK. The demo station is copied to the project complete with
all the parameterized data.
If necessary, customize the parameters to suit the individual
applications.

36 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2.6 Data structure in SIMATIC Manager

2.6 Data structure in SIMATIC Manager

Each component of SICAM plusTOOLS has its own data area. These
data areas are organized in containers and are seen as folders in a
hierarchical tree structure. SIMATIC Manager always displays the data/
folder structures in a split window.
G The navigation pane on the left shows the structure.
G The data pane on the right shows the contents.

sas400.gif

Pic. 2-14 Data structure in SIMATIC Manager

Switching To switch between the hierarchical levels within the data structure of a
hierarchical levels project, proceed as follows:
In the navigation pane, click on the plus sign in front of the symbol of
a hierarchical level. The lower hierarchical level opens and is
displayed as a tree structure. The plus sign turns to a minus sign.
Click on the minus sign to close the lower hierarchical level again.

Editing an Select the application or container in the data pane, press the right
application or mouse button and perform one of the operations offered in the context
container menu, e.g. Copy, Delete, Insert, Object Properties, etc.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 37


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
2 Basic Operating Instructions

38 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Installation and Deinstallation 3
Contents 3.1 Installation requirements 40

3.2 Installation 41

3.3 Deinstallation 47

3.4 Authorization 48

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 39


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
3 Installation and Deinstallation

3.1 Installation requirements

Operating system Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 2000 with Service Pack 1 or
Windows NT 4.0 with Service Pack 6

Note:
During the installation under Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 and
Windows 2000, you require administrator rights.

Basic hardware PC or PG with:


G Processor: Pentium 266 MHz, 600 MHz recommended
G RAM: 128 Mbytes, 256 Mbytes recommended
G Hard disk capacity: 4 Gbytes, 6 Gbytes recommended
G Graphics card: min. SVGA (recommended: SVGA with 2 Mbytes)
G Monitor: suitable for graphics card
G CD-ROM drive
G 3 inch floppy disk drive (1.44 MB)
G Keyboard
G Mouse

MPI (multipoint SICAM plusTOOLS communicates with external devices through an MPI
interface) (Multi Point Interface). This interface can be implemented using:
G a PC/MPI cable for the serial port of the PC, or
G an MPI PC plug-in board (ISA/PCI or PCMCIA).

Note:
The scope of supply of the components for SICAM plusTOOLS can be
found in the enclosed product information and the
SICAM SAS/RTU Planning and Design /15/.

40 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
3.2 Installation

3.2 Installation

One of the above Windows operating systems must be installed on your


PC.

Installation The components included in the scope of supply must be installed in the
sequence following order:
1. SIMATIC STEP7 V5.1 SP2,
2. SIMATIC STEP7 Hotfix2
3. Borland C++ V5.01
4. M7-SYS V5.00
5. CFC V5.2 and Hot-Fix 3.
6. NCM S7 - PROFIBUS SP1
7. SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS V4.0
8. SICAM SAS runtime components V4.0
9. DIGSI V4, optional (siehe Kapitel 3.2.2)
10.DOCPRO V5.0, optional (siehe Kapitel 3.2.3)

Installation of components 1 to 8 is carried out using the


SICAM plusTOOLS installation routine (siehe Kapitel 3.2.1).
You will find further instructions on user-defined installation of the
Borland Compiler in Kapitel 3.2.4.

Note:
To enable recognition of the adjusted information volume of
SIPROTEC 4 devices in SICAM plusTOOLS, SICAM plusTOOLS, and
DIGSI 4 must be installed on your computer.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 41


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
3 Installation and Deinstallation

3.2.1 SICAM plusTOOLS installation routine

To install, proceed as follows:


Please exit all applications (Microsoft Word etc.) because you will
need to restart Windows after installation of individual components to
ensure that all the system variables are entered. To do that, just follow
the on-screen instructions during installation.
Insert the CD with the SICAM SAS components and call up
SETUP_.exe.
Select the language for the user interface
Enter the product key.
Click on the Check Installation button.
The required components are output with their status Installed or Not
Installed.

Start the installation with the Install button and follow the on-screen
instructions of the setup program of the individual components.
A message is output on successful completion of each installation.

sas2001.gif

Pic. 3-1 Installation completed, example

42 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
3.2 Installation

Note:
During installation of STEP 7 V5.1, CFC, and SICAM plusTOOLS, you
will need to enter a license number. Use the license numbers of the
authorization disks.

Before using STEP 7 V5.1, you must restart Windows. Only then will all
Microsoft Windows entries be activated. If you do not restart Windows,
STEP 7 V5.1 will not run in its full version and you might incur a loss of
data.
SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS can only be installed when the full version
of STEP 7 V5.1 is installed.

Note:
SICAM plusTOOLS registers itself in Microsoft Windows system files.
With Microsoft Windows tools like the Explorer you must not move any
files or folders or alter SICAM data in the Windows registry in the
...\SIEMENS directory. Such modifications might prevent the program
from running correctly.

Optional products To install the optional components, proceed as follows:


Select the product and click on the
Install button.

Acrobat Reader V3.1 or higher is required to read the manuals.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 43


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
3 Installation and Deinstallation

3.2.2 Installing DIGSI V4

Note:

Please read the information in the README.TXT file on the DIGSI 4 CD


before starting installation.
If an older version of DIGSI 4 is already installed, you must uninstall that
version first.
During the installation under Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 and
Windows 2000, you require full administrator rights.

Install DIGSI 4 as follows:


Please exit all applications before installation to ensure that all
system variables relevant to DIGSI 4 are entered completely in the
system directories.
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the PC while it is
running. The setup menu is normally opened automatically.
Click on the DIGSI 4.xx button.
Follow the installation instructions.
Choose one of the installation options:
Full installation for initial installation
Partial installation for installation of option packages or for
subsequent installation of device drivers
Enter the serial number that you can take from the
product card provided.
Start Windows again before you work with DIGSI 4.

Manual start of the If the setup menu does not open automatically, proceed as follows:
installation routine
Click on the Windows Start menu and select menu item Run....
Enter x:\Digsi_4\Setup.exe in the input field.
(x stands for the drive letter of the CD-ROM drive).
Click on OK.
Follow the further installation instructions (see above).

44 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
3.2 Installation

Note:
If you want to install SICAM plusTOOLS again, proceed as follows:
Uninstall DIGSI 4
Install SICAM plusTOOLS
Install DIGSI 4
If DIGSI 4 has not been uninstalled for any reason, you can install it gain
after you have installed SICAM plusTOOLS DIGSI 4. We recommend
proceeding as described above.

3.2.3 Install DOCPRO

Configuration and parameterization of the SICAM SAS substation


automation system can also be documented using the system
component DOCPRO.
The program is not included in the scope of supply of SICAM plusTOOLS
and must be ordered separately.

3.2.4 Borland C++ V5.01 Installing

Installing Place the Borland C++ V5.01 CD in the CD-ROM drive of your
PC/PG and start the SETUP program as follows:
Start Run X:\SETUP.EXE, where X is the letter of your CD-ROM
drive.
In the Borland C++ Development Suite 5.01 window, click on
Borland C++ V5.01 to start installation of these components.
Make a note of the path of the Borland C++ folder BC5, as you will be
required to enter it subsequently when installing CFC.
Selecting User-Defined as the installation configuration for the
settings described below will enable you to save about 200 MB of
hard disk space during installation.
Select 32-bit Windows as the target platform.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 45


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
3 Installation and Deinstallation

In the Borland C++ Tools window, only enableCommand Line


Tools and Libraries and click on the Details button of the libraries.
In the Borland C++ Libraries window, only enableRun-Time
Libraries and Class Libraries and click on the Details button of the
runtime libraries.
In the Borland C++ Run-Time Libraries window, enableHeader
Files, Dynamic Libraries, and all Static Libraries. Click OK to return
to the Borland C++ libraries.
Click on the Details button of the Class Libraries. In the next
window, only Static Class Libraries, Dynamic Class Libraries, and
Obsolete Class Libraries should be enabled.

Note:
Software products must be deinstalled through Microsoft Windows:
Select Start Settings Control Panel Add/Remove Programs to
open the Add/Remove Programs Properties window.
Select the product you want to uninstall.
Select Uninstall.
After deinstallation of Borland C++ V5.01, Microsoft Windows must be
restarted.
That is the only way of uninstalling under Microsoft Windows.
After uninstalling, the system might still contain some files dynamically
created by Borland C++ V5.01. This is detected by the uninstall tool and
the following message is displayed: Some elements could not be
removed. You should manually remove items related to the
application. You can choose whether to delete or leave these
dynamically created files.

46 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
3.3 Deinstallation

3.3 Deinstallation

The SICAM plusTOOLS installation routine recognizes if an older version


of a system component is already on your system and uninstalls it before
installing the current version. That ensures that uninstalling of individual
components is always carried out in the correct order.
For this reason, we recommend that you only install and uninstall
SICAM plusTOOLS components using the installation routine.

Note:
If you are using the parameterization system for DIGSI V4 protection
units in conjunction with SICAM plus TOOLS, you will need to uninstall
these components before installing a new version of SICAM plusTOOLS.
This ensures problem-free transfer of parameters between the two
components.

Optional products To uninstall any optional products, proceed as follows:


Insert the CD with the SICAM SAS components and call up
SETUP_.exe.
Select the components that you want to uninstall and click on the
Uninstall button.

Note:
Installation or deinstallation are performed in Standard Windows
functions. The deinstallation program does not remove any files you
created. Directories containing your own files might therefore remain
undeleted.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 47


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
3 Installation and Deinstallation

3.4 Authorization

To use SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS, CFC, and STEP 7, you require
appropriate authorization on your computer, that is, usage rights. The
authorization with associated software are contained on the authorization
disks (installation counter = 1).
Before you can work with SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS, CFC, and
STEP 7 , you will need to transfer the authorizations from the
authorization disks to your computer.
Install the authorization by starting the authorization program
AUTHORSW.EXE using the Windows Start menu.
.

Caution:
For STEP 7 V5.1, the authorization must be installed on target drive C:
If C: is a compressed drive (for example, with DBLSPACE/DBLDRIVE),
select the associated host drive.
Please observe the notes in the README files on the authorization
diskette.
Directory C:\AX NF ZZ contains hidden files. These files and the
directory must never be deleted, moved, or copied. The files contain data
that is required for authorization of your software! If you do not observe
this warning, you might lose the authorization irretrievably.
The authorization diskette must not be write-protected. As the
authorization disk is used without write protection, there is a danger of
transferring a virus from a hard disk to the diskette. Therefore, before
installing or deinstalling an authorization, check your PG or PC for
viruses.
So as not to lose the authorization irretrievably, please observe the
following points:
When using an optimizing program (Scandisk/Defrag) that allows
fixed memory blocks to be move, you must only use this function if you
transfer the authorization back from the hard drive to the authorization
diskette before you use the function.
The authorization creates a cluster on the target drive that is marked
as defective. Do not try to restore this cluster.
Before formatting, compressing, or restoring your hard disk drive
or before installing a new operating system, deinstall the
authorization!

48 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Getting Started 4
Contents 4.1 Overview 50

4.2 Defining a project 54

4.3 Defining a station 56

4.4 Configuring the substation controller 57

4.5 Basic parameterization 65

4.6 Creating network nodes for PROFIBUS 83

4.7 Bay devices - connection 86

4.8 Structuring SAS information 95

4.9 Creating SAS information 96

4.10 Information distribution within the system 100

4.11 Parameterizing CFC Blocks 109

4.12 Configuring a control center connection 128

4.13 Telecontrol lists 131

4.14 Completing configuration 133

4.15 Compiling data 134

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 49


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.1 Overview

This chapter is intended to give you a basic idea of how to configure the
SICAM SAS substation automation system. This will be done by means
of an example, with very concise explanations.
When working with SICAM plusTOOLS for the first time, we recommend
you to stick to the order proposed here.
The open system architecture of SICAM plusTOOLS makes it possible
to proceed individually, permitting an almost any order of the individual
operating steps.
To highlight the logical structure, emphasis has purposely been placed
on the sequence of operations, that is, the default settings of the system
parameters are accepted wherever possible.
The following chapters provide details on how to change and set these
parameters.

Note:
Our example is based on configuring a SICAM substation automation
system, as depicted in chapter 1, picture 1-1.

50 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.1 Overview

Configuration
procedure SIMATIC Manager
Starting the
SIMATIC Manager

SIMATIC Manager
Creating a project /
defining a station

Hardware Configuration
Configuring the SICAM
SC

SIMATIC Manager
Creating network
nodes for PROFIBUS

COM IED
COM IED
Inserting bay
devices Defining the information
volume

SIM SIM SIM


Managing information Creating and Creating information
in the SIM Table and structuring items in the MIM Table
distributing it to HMI, information in
COM TC, CFC the SIM Browser

CFC
Configuring
automation functions
and command
processing

COM TC COM TC COM TC


Configuring a control Configuring a control Configuring
center connection in center connection in telecontrol lists
the the monitoring direction

SIM/SIMATIC Manager
Compiling the data
Dloading to target sys.

Pic. 4-1 SICAM plusTOOLS configuration procedure, schematic diagram

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 51


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

Project structure The containers of a project are represented in a hierarchical tree


structure, similar to the Windows folder structure.
The project hierarchical level contains:
G the station,
G a global title block,
G the MPI interface,
G the Profibus interfaces
G documentation (optional, if Docpro is installed) and
G the Devices folder.

SAS 400.gif

Pic. 4-2 Station structure in SICAM plusTOOLS

Station structure The station hierarchical level comprises the following containers:
G Hardware
This folder is automatically created by the system when a
SICAM SAS station is generated and it contains the parameterization
of the module racks and the plugged modules after the Hardware
Configuration.
G CP 443-5 Basic(x)
This folder contains the system data block for parameterizing the
Profibus interface.
G CPU 4xx-y
This folder holds the SIMATIC programs (CFC blocks) and the
defined links to the communication modules.
G COM IED (Communication to Intelligent Electronic Devices)
This folder is used to store the bay device and substation parameters.
It is generated as soon as a SICAM SAS station is inserted.

52 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.1 Overview

G MIM (Module Information Manager)


The folder contains all SAS information of SICAM SC in the command
direction.
G SIM (SICAM Information Manager)
The folder contains all SAS information. The information is entered
automatically during hardware configuration and parameterization of
the bay devices, substations, and telecontrol interfaces. You can add
to this information manually.
G COM TC (Communication to Telecontrol Center)
The folder is used to hold the parameters that are created
automatically or manually during configuration of communication with
higher-level control centers. The folder is created as soon as a
SICAM SAS station is inserted.
G MCPx (MCP assembly)
This folder contains the system data block parameterization of the
MCP assembly.
G Station identification
Here you will find information for commissioning and troubleshooting,
for example, status information from modules of SICAM SC,
messages from the communication protocols and bay devices.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 53


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.2 Defining a project

The first step is to define a project.

Starting the Open the SIMATIC Manager from the taskbar:


SIMATIC Manager Start SICAM plusTOOLS SIMATIC Manager.
Specify a working folder for your project with menu command
Options Customize (see chapter 2.3.1).

Creating an Select File New. The New dialog box appears offering a list of
SAS project projects already included in the project list.

SAS 001.gif

Pic. 4-3 Creating the DemoCity project

Select New Project.


Enter the project name DemoCity in the Name box.
Select Project (default setting) in the Type box.
Check the folder set in the Storage Location (Path) dialog box and
use the Browse... button to select another folder, if required. The
default setting is in your working folder (see chapter 2.3.1).
Confirm your input with OK.

Note:
Folder names must not exceed a maximum of 8 characters.

54 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.2 Defining a project

The following project window opens:

SAS 002.gif

Pic. 4-4 Project window of a new project

After you have created the project, the project window contains:
G Icon for the overall Project.
G Global Title Block object.
The tab cards of the Global Title Block object allow you, for example,
to define the layout for printout of your station documentation.
G MPI(1) object.
Interface of the SICAM SC for loading the configured data.
G Devices folder.
Folder for inserting the protection units into the project.
G Object documentation
Object-specific documentation of the project parameterization using
the optional system component DOCPRO.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 55


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.3 Defining a station

Creating a A Substation Controller (SICAM SC) corresponds to a SICAM SAS


new station station.
Mark the project name in the navigation window of the
SIMATIC Manager.
Create the station using Insert Station SICAM SAS.
The designation SICAM SAS is assigned by default.

Assigning a user- Proceed as follows:


specific
Select the station in the SIMATIC Manager's data pane.
name to a station
Click on the selected field. The mouse pointer will then change shape
to a text cursor.
Overwrite the station name with the designation On the Hill.
Confirm your input by pressing the RETURN key.

SAS 003.gif

Pic. 4-5 Renaming a SICAM SAS station

Note:
The standard designation SICAM SAS for the newly created station can
also be changed on exiting the Hardware Configuration in the
SIMATIC Manager.

Opening the In the navigation pane of SIMATIC Manager, the station is displayed as
station a folder. To open it, proceed as follows:
Click on the name On the Hill. The lower-level containers Hardware,
COM IED, COM TC, MIM, SIM and Station Identification are
displayed in the data pane.

56 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.4 Configuring the substation controller

4.4 Configuring the substation controller

Once the project and the station have been defined, the next step is to
configure the hardware of the SICAM substation controller using the
Hardware Configuration application.

Overview of
Hardware Configur Hardware Configuration Tab cards

ation Inserting a rack Defining


properties

Hardware Configuration Tab cards


Inserting a power Defining
supply module properties

Hardware Configuration Tab cards Parameter sheet


Placing Defining Parameterizing
a CPU properties

Hardware Configuration Tab cards Parameter sheet


Placing Defining Parameterizing
MCPs properties

Hardware Configuration Tab cards Parameter sheet


Placing CP 443- Defining Parameterizing
5 Basic properties

Hardware Configuration Tab cards Parameter sheet


Placing input/output Defining Parameterizing
modules properties

Expanding SICAM SAS with an expansion rack, if required


Hardware Configuration Tab cards
Inserting a rack Defining
properties

Hardware Configuration Tab cards


Placing a PS power Defining
supply module properties

Hardware Configuration Tab cards


Placing an IM send Defining
module (UR0) properties
Placing an IM
receive module

Hardware Configuration Tab cards Parameter sheet


Placing further Defining Parameterizing
modules properties

Pic. 4-6 Substation controller configuration procedure (central rack)

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 57


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.4.1 Calling up Hardware Configuration

Hardware Configuration is called as follows:


Select the designation Hardware and start Hardware Configuration
with Open object from the context menu. That opens the Hardware
Configuration application.
Open the hardware catalog from the context menu or with
Insert Hardware components.

SAS 004.gif

Pic. 4-7 Hardware Configuration dialog box with the Hardware Catalog

58 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.4 Configuring the substation controller

4.4.2 Inserting a module rack

First insert the module racks into the empty dialog box:
Open the Hardware catalog folder
SIMATIC 400/RACK-400.
Double-click on UR1 to insert the central rack into the
Hardware Configuration dialog box. The system will assign the
designation (0)UR1 to the central rack.
Insert another UR1 rack. The system will assign expansion rack
status to it and label it (1)UR1.

Representation The hardware configuration is displayed graphically in the top part of


the data pane. The racks are displayed as tables, the slots as
consecutively numbered rows of the tables.
The bottom part of the data pane shows an assembly table for the
selected rack or module. The columns show the module designation,
the order numbers, and the parameterized address ranges. This type
of display allows you to make a fast consistency check of the address
ranges.

SAS 005.gif

Pic. 4-8 Display of Hardware configuration

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 59


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.4.3 Inserting modules general information

In the SIMATIC 400 folder of the Hardware Catalog, open the


subfolder of the module you want to insert.
Select the slot.
Double-click on the hardware component in the Hardware Catalog.
The chosen module will be inserted in the selected slot.
Or:
Select the component you require and copy it to the slot in the rack by
drag-and-drop.

Note:
Plausibility checks monitor the consistency of the assembly. Please also
observe the assembly rules, see chapter 1.3 and SICAM SAS Technical
Description /12/.

60 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.4 Configuring the substation controller

4.4.4 Inserting CPUs

Start equipping the racks with the basic modules, the communication
modules, and the interface modules:
Open the
SIMATIC-400/SICAM-400/PS-400 folder.
Insert PS 24-60V DC power supply modules 1 of both the central and
the expansion rack.
The PS module occupies 3 slots.
Open the
SIMATIC-400/CPU-400/CPU M7 folder.
Insert the CPU 488-3 V5.0 in slot 4 of the central rack. The
CPU module occupies 2 slots.
Open the
SIMATIC-400/SICAM-400/MCP-400 folder.
Insert an MCP1 assembly in slot 6 and an MCP2 assembly in slot 8 of
the central rack.
The MCP1 occupies 2 slots, the MCP2 occupies 3 slots.
Open the
SIMATIC-400/CP-400/PROFIBUS/CP443-5 Basic folder.
Insert the PROFIBUS FMS communication processor CP 443-
5 Basic 6GK7443-5FX01 V3.2 into slot 17 of the basic rack.
The Properties - Profibus Interface CP 443-5 Basic window is
displayed. Parameterize the PROFIBUS interface on the Parameters
tab card:

SAS1002.gif

Pic. 4-9 Properties - PROFIBUS Interface CP 443-5 window

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 61


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

Select Address 2.
In the Subnet section, click on the New... button.
The Properties - New Subnet PROFIBUS window is displayed.
On the Network Settings tab card, select
Baud rate 187.5 kbps and under Profile , select Universal (DP/
FMS).

SAS1003.gif

Pic. 4-10 Properties - New Subnet window

Accept the settings in the


Properties - New Subnet PROFIBUS window by clicking on OK.
Accept the settings in the
Properties - Profibus interface CP 443-5 Basic on window by
clicking on OK.

Open the
SIMATIC-400/IM-400 folder.
Insert the IM460-0 send interface module into slot 18 of the central
rack.
Insert the IM461-0 receive interface module into slot 18 of the
expansion rack.

62 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.4 Configuring the substation controller

4.4.5 Inserting input/output modules

Adding input/output modules to the Hardware Configuration. Select the


following modules from the folders indicated below:
G Digital input module DI 32xDC24/60V
(SIMATIC 400/SICAM-400/DI-400 folder).
G Command output module CO 32xDC24/125V
(SIMATIC 400/SICAM-400/CO-400 folder).
G Command release module CR DC24/60V
(SIMATIC 400/SICAM-400/CR-400 folder).
G Analog input module AI-C 32x12Bit
(SIMATIC 400/SICAM-400/AI-400 folder)
G Analog input module AI-V 32x12Bit
(SIMATIC 400/SICAM-400/AI-400 folder)

Insert two DI modules into slots 11 and 12 of the central rack.


Insert two CO modules into slots 13 and 14 of the central rack.
Insert a CR module into slot 15 of the central rack.
Insert an AI-C module into slot 4 of the expansion rack.
Insert an AI-V module into slot 5 of the expansion rack.

Note:
The functionality and the technical specifications of each module are
described in:
G the SICAM SAS Technical Description /12/,
G the SICAM SAS/RTU Planning and Design /15/ and
G the manuals of each module.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 63


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

Demo The complete Hardware Configuration of the demo station On the Hill:
configuration

sas007.gif

Pic. 4-11 Hardware Configuration of the demo station On the Hill

Save by selecting Station Save.

64 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.5 Basic parameterization

4.5 Basic parameterization

4.5.1 General parameterization of modules

In our example, you call the parameter sheets manually by double-


clicking on the corresponding module in the rack.
The dialog boxes for parameterizing the modules are divided into tab
cards whose text boxes are already filled with default values. Where
possible, these default values have been used for our example.

4.5.2 Basic modules

PS For the PS power supply module, the default parameter settings are
accepted without exception.

CPU For the CPU, parameterize the Synchronization Mode on the


Diagnostics / Clock tab card. The default settings of the other tab cards
are not changed.
Open the Diagnostics / Clock tab card.
In the Clock group box, select the variant As slave from the drop-
down list of the Synchronization Mode text box.
Confirm with OK.

SAS 218.gif

Pic. 4-12 Diagnostics / Clock tab card of the CPU

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 65


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.5.3 Communication modules

MCP assembly During the hardware configuration of the communication modules of the
MCP assemblies, the communication interfaces with higher-level control
centers and bay devices are parameterized.
This specifies the transmission protocol and assigns the external
interfaces of the modules to the internal channels of the MCP
communications processor (see chapter 5.6).
An MCP assembly always consists of the MCP communications
processor and a maximum of four XC2 and/or XF6 expansion modules.
The MCP communications processor has an interface for external time
signal reception (DCF77 or GPS).

Note:
We recommend using the GPS receiver specified in the SICAM SAS/
RTU Planning and Design /15/.
It does not occupy any of the internal channels nor any external interface
of the MCP communications processor.
On the Time parameters tab card, under Using of SYNC input, select
the entry DCF77 for this GPS receiver.
When using another GPS receiver, COM1 and channel 6 of the MCP
communications processor are occupied by the system.

To avoid any conflicts during parameterization of the communication


interfaces, you should always stick to the following order when editing the
tab cards of an MCP assembly:
G Time parameters tab card
G Protocols tab card
G Ports tab card (for TCP/IP only, not used in the example)
G Basic parameters tab card

66 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.5 Basic parameterization

Parameterizing the In our example, the MCP1 assembly is used for communication with two
MCP assemblies higher-level control centers. Connection is implemented with dual-
channel redundancy with the IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC) transmission
protocol.
The MCP assembly consists of the MCP communications processor and
the XC2 expansion module.
The MCP2 assembly is used to communicate with bay devices. It
consists of the MCP communications processor and two XF6 expansion
modules.
Bay devices with RS485 interface are connected to the COM1 and
COM2 serial interfaces of the MCP communications processor, bay
devices with fiber optic interfaces are connected to the COM1 to COM6
interfaces of the XF6 expansion modules.
IEC 60870-5-103 (COM IED) is chosen as the transmission protocol.

MCP1 Start parameterization with the MCP1 assembly.

MCP1 time tab card Open the Time parameters tab card.
Select DCF77 from the drop-down list of text box
Using of SYNC input.
Confirm with OK.

SAS 050.gif

Pic. 4-13 MCP assembly MCP1, Time Parameters tab card

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 67


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

MCP1 protocols tab Open the Protocols tab card.


card
In the Marshalling Protocols group box, select the telecontrol
protocol IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC) from the drop-down list of the
text box Protocol types for Channel 1 to Channel 4.

sas 008.gif

Pic. 4-14 MCP assembly MCP1, Protocols tab card

Using the Parameterization... button of Channel 1, open the


Properties Channel 1 dialog box.

68 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.5 Basic parameterization

Properties
Channel 1

sas701a.gif

Pic. 4-15 Properties of channel 1 IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC),


Protocols tab card

Creating a Click on the Create button and select the remote terminal interface
connection to a TCC IEC 60870-5-101 as the connection to a higher-level control
control center center.
Accept the default settings of the Protocol and Channel info tab
cards by confirming with OK.
Repeat the last five steps for channels 2 to 4.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 69


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

Basic parameters Open the Basic parameters tab card of the MCP1.
tab card of MCP1
Enable the Diagnosis alarm release function in the
Alarm settings group box.
In the Connection definition group, assign internal Channel 1 to the
COM 1 interface of the MCP communications processor in the
Assigned channels text box (drop-down list).
Assign internal Channel 2 to the COM 2 interface.
In the Hardware extensions group box, select XC2 for slot 1 from
the drop-down list of the Expansion modules.

SAS 009.gif

Pic. 4-16 MCP assembly MCP1, Basic Parameters tab card

70 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.5 Basic parameterization

Parameterizing Open the Properties tab card of the XC2 expansion module by
the XC2 module pressing the Parameterization button.
In the Assigned channels text boxes of the Connection definition
group box, assign internal Channel 3 to the COM 1 interface and
internal Channel 4 to the COM 2 interface (with the drop-down lists).
Confirm with OK.

SAS 010.gif

Pic. 4-17 Expansion module XC2, Properties tab card

Confirm with OK on the Basic parameters tab card.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 71


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

MCP2 Now parameterize the MCP2 assembly.

MCP2 Time Accept the default settings (without clock control).


Parameters tab
card

MCP2 Protocols tab Open the Protocols tab card.


card
In the Marshalling protocols group box, select the IEC 60870-5-
103 (COM IED) bay device protocol from the drop-down lists of the
Protocol types text boxes for Channel 1 to Channel 6.
Accept the other default parameter settings.

Basic parameters Open the Basic parameters tab card.


MCP2 tab card
Enable the Diagnosis alarm release function in the Alarm settings
group box.
Diagnosis alarm release.
In the Assigned channels text boxes of the
Connection definition group box, assign
internal channel 1 for the COM 1 interface and internal channel 2 for
the COM 2 interface.
In the Interface standards text boxes, select RS485 for both
interfaces.
In the Hardware extensions group box, select XF6 for slot 1 and slot
2 from the drop-down list of the Expansion modules.

72 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.5 Basic parameterization

Parameterizing the Open the Properties tab card of the XF6 expansion module in slot 1
XF6 module by pressing the Parameterization button.
In the Assigned channels text boxes of the Connection definition
group box, assign
internal Channel 3 to the COM 1 to COM 3 interfaces and
internal Channel 5 to the COM 4 to COM 6 interfaces
(via drop-down lists).
Confirm with OK.

SAS 011.gif

Pic. 4-18 Expansion module XF6, Properties tab card

Open the Properties tab card of the XF6 expansion module in slot 2
by pressing the Parameterization button.
In the Assigned channels text boxes of the Connection definition
group box, assign
internal Channel 4 to the COM 1 to COM 3 interfaces and
internal Channel 6 to the COM 4 to COM 6 interfaces
(via drop-down lists).
Confirm with OK.
Confirm with OK on the Basic parameters tab card.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 73


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.5.4 DI Modules

Parameterize the DI modules as follows:

Slot 11 Open the Basic parameters tab card.


Enable the Diagnosis alarm release function in the Alarm settings
group box.
Diagnosis alarm release.
Select the following indication types for the inputs:
I0.0 - I0.7 Single-point indication
I1.0 - I1.7 Fleeting indication
I2.0 - I2.7 Double-point indication
I3.0 - I3.7 Double-point indication.
Open the corresponding parameter sheet by pressing the Parameter
button.
Parameterization.
Disable inputs I0.4 to I0.7.
Disable inputs I1.2 to I1.7.
Disable inputs I3.5/I3.4 and I3.7/I3.6.

SAS 012.gif

Pic. 4-19 DI module, Basic Parameters tab card

74 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.5 Basic parameterization

Slot 12 Open the Basic parameters tab card.


Enable the Diagnosis alarm release function in the Alarm settings
group box.
Diagnosis alarm release.
Select the following indication types for the inputs:
I0.0 - I0.7 Metered value capturing
I1.0 - I1.7 Bit pattern indication.
Open the parameter sheet for metered value capturing by pressing
the Parameter button.
Disable inputs I0.3/I0.2, I0.5/I0.4, and I0.7/I0.6.
Open the parameter sheet for bit pattern indication by pressing the
Parameter button.
From the drop-down list of the text box, select 3 bytes as the bit
pattern length and confirm the Enable Parameter window, which is
then opened, with OK.
Inputs I2.0 - I2.7 and I3.0 - I3.7 are functionally assigned by the
system.
Confirm with OK.

SAS 131.gif

Pic. 4-20 DI module, Basic Parameters tab card

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 75


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.5.5 CO module

For the CO module, parameterize the Alarm Settings and the Output
type on the Basic Parameters tab card. The output type determines
tripping of the downstream load disconnecting relays.

Note:
When setting the output type, you must take into consideration whether
the CO module is operated together with the CR module or not, as the
CR module acts additively on the output type (see chapter 5.10).

Slot 13 Enable the Diagnosis alarm release function in the


Alarm settings group box.
Select 1-pole command output as the output type and call the
parameter sheet of the outputs by pressing the Parameter button.
Accept the default setting DC for outputs O0.0 to O3.0 and enter SC
for outputO4.0,
outputO4.1 is automatically assigned SC.
Disable outputs O5.0 to O15.1
Confirm with OK.

Sas052a.gif

Pic. 4-21 CO module, parameterization of 1-pole output type

Confirm with OK on the Basic parameters tab card.

76 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.5 Basic parameterization

Slot 14 The CO module in slot 14 is used in our example for the output of digital
setpoint values and persistent commands.
For this reason, the module is operated in S7 standard mode (digital
output).
During hardware configuration, only the status messages are created for
this module.
The SAS information items required for these command outputs are
created manually (see chapter 4.9.2).
Enable the Diagnosis alarm release function in the
Alarm settings group box.
Select Digital output as the output type (default setting).
Confirm with OK.

SAS 212.gif

Pic. 4-22 CO module, Basic parameters tab card

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 77


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.5.6 CR module

For the CR command release module, parameterize the start address of


the inputs and outputs and deactivate inputs that are not assigned. By
default, digital output is the data type assigned to the outputs.
Open the Addresses tab card.
First check on the Addresses tab card to see whether the start
addresses of the inputs and the outputs are identical.

Note:
The value of the start addresses for the inputs must correspond to the
value of the start addresses for the outputs. The system permits input of
unused addresses only.

Open the Basic parameters tab card.


Enable the Diagnosis alarm release function in the Alarm settings
group box.
Diagnosis alarm release.
Select Single-point indication as the indication type for the inputs.
Call the tab card for parameterizing the inputs by pressing the
Parameter button.
Disable inputs I0.2 to I0.7.
Confirm with OK.

SAS 015.gif

Pic. 4-23 CR module, Basic Parameters tab card

78 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.5 Basic parameterization

4.5.7 AI-C module

Parameterize the AI-C module as follows:


Open the Basic Parameters tab card and make the settings in
accordance with the technical specifications of your hardware
environment. For our example, select +/-20 mA.
Enable the Diagnosis alarm release function in the Alarm settings
group box.
Diagnosis alarm release.
Open the Inputs tab card. The I00-I07 input group is active.
Input I00: Select the 4..20.0 mA measuring range from the
drop-down list.
Input I01: Select the +/-10.0 mA measuring range from the
drop-down list.
Activate the Event buffer entry check boxes for inputs I00 and I01.
Disable inputs I02 to I07.
Enable the input groups I08-I15, I16-I23,
and I24-I31and
one after the other and disable the corresponding inputs.
Confirm with OK.

SAS 166.gif

Pic. 4-24 AI-C module, Inputs tab card.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 79


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.5.8 AI-V module

Parameterize the selected AI-V module as follows:


Open the Basic Parameters tab card and make the settings in
accordance with the technical specifications of your hardware
environment.
Enable the Diagnosis alarm release function in the Alarm settings
group box.
Diagnosis alarm release.
Open the Inputs tab card. The I00-I07 input group is active.
Input I00: Select the 0..10.0 V measuring range from the
drop-down list.
Input I01: Select the +/-2.50 V measuring range from the
drop-down list.
Activate the Event buffer entry check boxes for inputs I00 and I01.
Disable inputs I02 to I07.
Enable the input groups I08-I15, I16-I23, and I24-I31and
one after the other and disable the corresponding inputs.
Confirm with OK.

SAS 215.gif

Pic. 4-25 AI-V module, Inputs tab card.

80 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.5 Basic parameterization

4.5.9 IM module

The connection between the central rack and the expansion racks is
established using the Interface modules IM.
G For the IM461-0 receive interface module (in the expansion rack), the
default parameterization is accepted.
G The connection of the expansion rack is established on the
Connection tab card of the IM460-0 send interface module in the
central rack.

To parameterize the connection, proceed as follows:


Open the Connection tab card of the IM460-0 send interface module.
Select expansion rack 1 in the Unconnected Racks dialog box and
click the Connect button of the C1 interface.

SAS017.gif

Pic. 4-26 Send interface module IM460-0, Connection tab card

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 81


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.5.10 Exit Hardware Configuration

Parameterization of the IM modules completes the Hardware


Configuration.
Select Station Save and Compile. After a successful compilation
run by the Update Manager, the parameterized configuration data of
the Substation Controller will be available to the other applications of
SICAM plusTOOLS.
Quit the Hardware Configuration application with Station Exit.

The SICAM plusTOOLS configuration system has added to the project


structure as follows during the hardware configuration:

SAS 400.gif

Pic. 4-27 Project structure after completion of hardware configuration

82 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.6 Creating network nodes for PROFIBUS

4.6 Creating network nodes for PROFIBUS

To connect bay devices with the PROFIBUS FMS network, you need to
create a network node for each bay device.

Inserting Select the Devices folder in the navigation pane of


network nodes SIMATIC Manager and open the Device Catalog from the context
menu.
In the Device Catalog, open the
SIPROTEC 4 Gerte/6MB Feld Ankopplungseinh folder, select
device 6MB525 and drag it into the SIMATIC Manager's data pane by
drag-and-drop.

sas1004.gif

Pic. 4-28 Inserting network nodes

Parameterizing Click on the inserted network node 6MB525 (FMS) and select the
network nodes Properties 6MB525window under Object Properties in the context
menu.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 83


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

sas1004b.gif

Pic. 4-29 Properties 6MB525

On the PROFIBUS FMS Connections tab card, click on the New


button and open the Properties PROFIBUS Interface window.

sas1004a.gif

Pic. 4-30 Properties PROFIBUS interface

Under Subnet, select the entry PROFIBUS(1) 187.5 Kbps and


confirm with OK.

84 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.6 Creating network nodes for PROFIBUS

sas1004c.gif

Pic. 4-31 Properties 6MB525, PROFIBUS FMS connections tab card

Confirm with OK in the Properties 6MB525 window.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 85


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.7 Bay devices - connection

The SAS information items of the bay devices of the SICAM SAS
substation automation system connected with
G IEC 60870-5-103 (COM IED),
G PROFIBUS FMS and
G DNP 3.0 (COM IED)
are created and managed using the COM IED application.
In the data pane of SIMATIC Manager, select COM IED and open the
application with Open Object in the context menu.
Open the Bay Device Catalog with Options Catalog.

4.7.1 Inserting bay devices

Select the from the


Protection relays/Numerical protection relays 7xxx folder the
7SA511 protection relay and drag it to the COM IED symbol in the
navigation pane by drag-and-drop.
Rename it F1_7SA511.
Select from the Bay Controller
(IEC 60870-5-103)/6MB525 folder the bay controller Var. 6 and drag-
and-drop it to the designation COM IED in the dialog box.
It is inserted with the name 6MB525 Var 6 (T103).
Select thethe bay controller Var. 6 from the Bay
Controller (PROFIBUS FMS)/6MB525 folder and drag-and-drop it to
the designation COM IED in the dialog box.
It is inserted under the name 6MB525 Var 6 (FMS).

86 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.7 Bay devices - connection

SAS021.gif

Pic. 4-32 COM IED and Bay Device Catalog

Parameterizing Select F1_7SA511 and open the Properties tab card by choosing
7SA511 Object Properties from the context menu.
On the Parameters tab card in the Device group box, select V03.2x
from the drop-down list of the Version number text box.
Enter 1 in the Device number text box.

sas504.gif

Pic. 4-33 7SA511 bay device, Parameters tab card

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 87


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

On the Connection tab card, select the MCP2 assembly from the
drop-down list of the Module text box.
Select internal channel 3 (IEC 60870-5-103) from the drop-down list
of the Channel text box.
Select the external interface XF6 (Subslot1): COM1 from
the drop-down list of the Interface text box.

SAS 221.gif

Pic. 4-34 Bay device 7SA511, Connection tab card

Confirm with OK.

The entire information volume of bay device 7SA511 is imported.

sas221a.gif

Pic. 4-35 Bay device 7SA511, data import

88 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.7 Bay devices - connection

Parameterizing the Select 6MB525 Var 6 (T103) and open the Properties tab card by
6MB525 Var 6 choosing Object Properties from the context menu.
(T103)
On the Parameter tab card, under Device, Version, select Standard
from the drop-down list.
Enter 20 in the Device number text box.

sas505.gif

Pic. 4-36 6MB525 Var 6 (T103) bay controller, Parameters tab card

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 89


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

On the Connection tab card, select the MCP2 assembly from the
drop-down list of the Module text box.
Select internal channel 1 (IEC 60870-5-103) from the drop-down list
of the Channel text box.
Select the external interface Basic module: COM1 from
the drop-down list of the Interface text box.
Confirm with OK.

SAS 022.gif

Pic. 4-37 Bay controller 6MB525 Var 6 (T103), Connection tab card

The entire information volume of bay device 6MB525 Var 6 (T103) is


imported.

Close the report.

90 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.7 Bay devices - connection

Parameterizing the Select 6MB525 Var 6 (FMS) COM IED and open the Properties tab
6MB525 Var 6 card with Object Properties in the context menu.
(FMS)
On the Parameter tab card, under Device, Version, select Standard
from the drop-down list.

sas506.gif

Pic. 4-38 6MB525 Var 6 (T) bay controller, Parameters tab card

On the Connection tab card, select PROFIBUS(1) from the drop-


down list of the Bus text box.

sas508.gif

Pic. 4-39 6MB525 Var 6 (FMS) bay controller, Connection tab card

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 91


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

Use the Select button to choose the Select Device dialog box.

sas507.gif

Pic. 4-40 Select Device

Select the entry 6MB525 (FMS) and confirm with OK.


Confirm in the Properties 6MB525 dialog box with OK.

The entire information volume of bay device 6MB525 Var 6 (FMS) is


imported.

Saving Save the parameterization by choosing Station Save.

92 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.7 Bay devices - connection

4.7.2 Sorting SAS information items of the bay devices

Upon saving the parameterization, all telegrams of the bay device are
imported into the system, and names for the telegrams are created and
automatically linked to an SAS information item.
The SAS information is stored in groups below the bay device name.
You can gain an overview of the information volume by displaying the
SAS information in a sorted view:
Double-click on F1_7SA511 in the COM IED navigation pane.
The COM IED table is displayed with the alphabetically sorted SAS
information items of the bay device (General tab card).
Sort the information by hierarchical name, name, type, function type,
or info number by clicking on the corresponding column header.

sas023.gif

Pic. 4-41 COM IED Table for F1_7SA511

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 93


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.7.3 Selecting the information volume of the bay devices

You keep number the SAS information items of the bay devices down to
the information volume actually required.
Switch to the Indications tab card.
Select all items of SAS information of the bay device that you do not
need (multiple selection is possible).
Delete the information by choosing Delete from the context menu.
Repeat the delete operation on the Commands, Measured values,
and Metered values tab cards.
Save your changes by choosing Station Save.

SAS 239.gif

Pic. 4-42 Reducing the information volume

Select the 6MB525 Var 6 (T103) bay device and repeat the delete
procedure.
Save your changes by choosing Station Save.
Select the 6MB525 Var 6 (FMS) bay device and repeat the delete
procedure.
Save your changes by choosing Station Save.
Quit the COM IED application with Station Exit.

94 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.8 Structuring SAS information

4.8 Structuring SAS information

Now generate the station topology.

Creating groups Click on the On the hill symbol in the navigation pane of
SIMATIC Manager, select the SIM symbol in the data pane, and open
SIM Browser from the context menu.
Select the On the Hill folder.
Create a new group with Insert Group and change its name to
20 kV.
Create a further group with the name 6 kV.
Select the folder 6 kV and use
Insert Group to insert the folders F1, F2 and F3.

Structuring Select F1_7SA511 and drag-and-drop the bay device onto the F1
symbol.
Move the 6MB525 Var 6 (T103) bay device to F2.
Move the 6MB525 Var 6 (FMS) bay device to F2.
Move the modules of the substation controller as shown in picture 4-
43.
Select CO\0\13 in the navigation pane and then output O03_0 in the
data pane. Drag the output to the 20 kV symbol and rename it
V1_O03_0.
Move DI\0\11, input I3_2 to the 20kV symbol and rename it V1_I3_2.
Save by selecting Station Save.

SAS 026.gif

Pic. 4-43 Hierarchical structure of the SAS information

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 95


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.9 Creating SAS information

4.9.1 Creating SAS information for derived information

If you require derived information items, such as group indications or limit


value violation indications, you must create SAS information items for
them in the selected level of the hierarchy.

Creating SAS In theSIM Browser, select the 20kV folder.


information
Select Insert Indication Single (SP) from the context menu.
Overwrite the name indication with Group-ind1.
Save your changes by selecting Station Save.
Derived information items are linked on-line by the CFC application. You
must therefore establish a link between the newly created
SAS information item and the CFC.
Select Group-ind1 in the data pane of the SIM Browser and open the
SIM Table by choosing Open Object from the context menu.
Line 20kV\Group1 is selected.
In the Source column, select CFC from the Connect to menu item in
the context menu.
The associated CFC variable is automatically created in the CFC
column.
Select Yes from the context menu of the HMI Display column.
Save by selecting Station Save.

sas1009a.gif

Pic. 4-44 SIM Table, Indications tab card

96 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.9 Creating SAS information

4.9.2 Creating SAS information items for output modules

The Hardware Configuration application does not create any


SAS information items for modules that are operated in S7 mode.
To enable the SICAM SAS substation automation system to process the
information from these modules consistently, manual post-
parameterization is necessary using the MIM Table. You must create
this information for the CO module in slot 14, which is used for the
output of digital setpoint values and persistent commands in our
example.

Select the MIM symbol in the SIMATIC Manager. Open the


MIM Table by choosing Open Object from the context menu.
Switch to the Standard output tab card.

Creating a Select the empty row and keep the cursor on the row number.
connection
Select Insert Setpoint Value Digital (SE_D) 8 from the
context menu.
A new table row is inserted into the Standard output tab card. The
red color of the characters indicates that the link is not yet complete.
Select the empty row and keep the cursor on the row number.
Select Insert Command Single Persistent (SC_PER) from
the context menu.
Another table row with red text is inserted into the Standard output
tab card.
Select the Rack cell in the newly inserted table row and select
Rack 0 from the context menu.
Select the Slot cell in the newly inserted table row and select Slot 14
from the context menu.
The rack type is now displayed in the Rack type column. At the same
time, the SIM Table is updated.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 97


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

Select the Connection cell in the line with the newly inserted
information of the type SC_PER and select the value O1_0 from the
drop-down list.
The color of the text changes to black.
Save by selecting Station Save.

sas860.gif

Pic. 4-45 MIM Table, Standard output tab card

Note:
The outputs of the CR module are operated in S7 mode only and can
also be used for outputting persistent commands. The necessary
SAS information must be created explicitly.

Note:
You can also output setpoints and persistent commands using SIMATIC
standard modules DO. You will have to create additional status
indications for these modules:
To do that, insert a single-point indication SP (modules not plugged) and
two fleeting indications SP_F (module faulty, wrong module) from the
Insert Indication context menu.

98 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.9 Creating SAS information

Creating and Select the Hierarchical name cell in rows 1 and 2 of the MIM Table
linking SAS and select Create SAS informationfrom the context menu. The
information Hierarchical names are entered.

sas861.gif

Pic. 4-46 MIM Table, Standard output tab card

Save by selecting Station Save.


Quit the application by selecting Station Exit.

Note:
Manually created SAS information can be further processed by the CFC,
HMI, or COM TC in the same way as information that has been created
automatically by configuration of SICAM SC and the bay devices.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 99


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.10 Information distribution within the system

The SICAM Information Manager manages all the SAS information.


The SIM Table serves to parameterize the distribution of the individual
items of information within the system.
This is how to define whether
G SAS information is to be implemented for communication with higher-
level control centers (TCCx column),
G SAS information is to be displayed (HMI column),
G SAS information is to be further processed by the SICAM message
management ( HMI1 List and HMI2 List columns) or
G Commands are to be triggered by the Human Machine Interface
(HMI1 List and HMI2 List columns).
In addition, define the source (or by commands, the target) of an item of
information, that is, by which application an item of information will be
created.
In our example, you have already created a group indication and
configured the CFC application as its source. This group indication is
created by a CFC block by a logic operation applied to single-point
indications.
Another function of the SIM Table is to assign process feedback
indications to commands. The assignment can be implemented by the
command (see chapter 4.10.1) or by the indication (see chapter 4.10.2).

Note:
SAS information for which distribution is not yet configured in the system
is highlighted in red. The color of the text changes to black as soon as a
plausible link is entered.

100 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.10 Information distribution within the system

4.10.1 Assigning process feedback to a command

Select the Commands tab card in the SIM Table.


Select for the 6kV\F3\CO\0\13\O00_0 command the
Feedback cell.
Select Connect to... from the context menu.
The SIM Browser opens.
Select 6 kV\F3\DI\0\11 in the SIM Browser and double-click on I2_0
in the data pane.
The hierarchical name of the process feedback is written into the
Feedback cell.

sas1011a.gif

Pic. 4-47 Assigning process feedback to a command

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 101


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.10.2 Assigning a command to process feedback

Select the Indications tab card in the SIM Table.


Select for the 6kV\F3\DI\0\11\I3_0 indication the
Is process feedback of cell.
Select Connect to... from the context menu.
The SIM Browser opens.
Select 6 kV\F3\CO\0\13 in the SIM Browser and double-click on
O01_0 in the data pane.
The hierarchical name of the command is written into the
Is process feedback of cell.

sas037a.gif

Pic. 4-48 Assigning a command to process feedback

102 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.10 Information distribution within the system

4.10.3 Assigning information

Commands tab Select the Commands tab card in the SIM Table.
card
In the With CR (command release) column, select the row with the
hierarchical name 6kV\F3\CO\0\13\O01_0.
Choose Yes from the context menu. This defines the software link of
the double command of the DC_PUL (double command) of the CO
command output module with the CR command release module and
at the same time, parameterizes a 1 1/2-pole safe command output.

sas037b.gif

Pic. 4-49 SIM Table, Commands tab card

Note:
The color of the text changes to red until you create the associated CFC
variables that are necessary for command output

In theHMI1 List column, select Yes from the context menu (or double-
click on the cell). This establishes the link to the Human Machine
Interface. This link forms the basis for control of an item of switchgear
from a detailed diagram.
Repeat the above steps for all information items or table rows that
belong to the 6kV\F3\CO\0\13 module.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 103


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

Status information For the hierarchical name, select on the Status information tab card:
tab card Status\DI\0\11\Module_unplugged
Status\DI\0\12\Module_unplugged
Status\CO\0\13\Module_unplugged
Status\CO\0\14\Module_unplugged
Status\CO\0\15\Module_unplugged
with Yesfrom the contact menu in the HMI1 List column in each case.
This establishes the connection to the Human Machine Interface and
creates the basis for logging these single-point indications in event
and alarm lists.

sas 229a.gif

Pic. 4-50 SIM Table, Status Information tab card

104 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.10 Information distribution within the system

Indications Select on the Indications tab card for the hierarchical name
tab card 20kV\Group-ind1 in the HMI Display column and the HMI1 List
columns with Yes from the context menu. Then the Group-ind1
group indication can be included in reports by the Human Machine
Interface and displayed in a diagram.

sas229b.gif

Pic. 4-51 SIM Table, Indications tab card

Measured values For the measured values of the AI modules, select Yes from the
tab card context menu of the HMI Display column. These measured values
can then be displayed by the Human Machine Interface.

sas041a.gif

Pic. 4-52 SIM Table, Measured values tab card

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 105


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

Metered Values tab For the metered value, select Yes from the context menu of the
card HMI Display column. This metered value can then be displayed by
the Human Machine Interface.

sas042a.gif

Pic. 4-53 SIM Table, Metered values tab card

106 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.10 Information distribution within the system

4.10.4 Creating the SAS CFC variables

If you want an SAS information item to be processed by the CFC


application, you must first create the CFC variables in the SIM Table.
We will carry out this parameterization using the Group-ind1 group
indication and a command output with command release as an example.
Open the SIM Table.

Command output Switch to the Commands tab card.


In the row with the hierarchical name 6kV\F3\CO\0\13\O00_0, click on
the CFC-IN column and create the CFC variable
6kV\F3\CO\0\13.diO00_0 with Create from the context menu.
At the same time, the system will create the CFC variable
6kV\F3\CO\013.doO00_0 in the CFC-OUT cell.
Repeat this step for 6kV\F3\CO\0\13\O01_0.

sas1010a.gif

Pic. 4-54 Creating CFC variables for command processing

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 107


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

Group indication Switch to the Status Information tab card.


Select the following hierarchical names:

Status information\DI\0\11\Module_unplugged
Status information\DI\0\12\Module_unplugged
Status information\CO\0\13\Module_unplugged
Status information\CO\0\14\Module_unplugged
Status information\CR\0\15\Module_unplugged

Note:
To select more than one hierarchical name, press and hold
the CTRL key and click on the required names.

Create the CFC variables in the CFC column by selecting Create from
the context menu:

Status\DI\0\11.biModule_unplugged
Status\DI\0\12.biModule_unplugged
Status\CO\0\13.biModule_unplugged
Status\CO\0\14.biModule_unplugged
Status\CR\0\15.biModule_unplugged

sas227a.gif

Pic. 4-55 Creating CFC variables for linked information

Save all entries in the SIM Table by choosing


Station Save and quit the application with Station Exit.

108 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.11 Parameterizing CFC Blocks

4.11 Parameterizing CFC Blocks

After you have assigned CFC as the source to the Group-ind1 group
indication and have created the CFC variables for all inputs and outputs
that are involved in the link in the SIM Table, all requirements for CFC
parameterization will have been fulfilled.

Creating a First create a chart folder:


chart folder
Select the M7 Program container in the navigation pane of the
SIMATIC Manager.
Select Insert M7 software Chart container.

sas043.gif

Pic. 4-56 Creating chart container

sas043a.gif

Pic. 4-57 Inserting a chart folder

That creates a folder named Charts.


Rename the container CFC Charts.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 109


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

Calling CFC Open the container CFC Charts and insert a CFC chart with Insert
New Object CFC from the context menu.

sas044b.gif

Pic. 4-58 Inserting a CFC chart

The CFC chart named CFC1 is displayed in the data pane.


Select the CFC1 container and open it with Open Object in the
context menu.

SAS044a.gif

Pic. 4-59 Calling CFC

110 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.11 Parameterizing CFC Blocks

4.11.1 Importing SICAM CFC blocks

Preparing CFC Before you configure the CFC charts, the SICAM CFC blocks must be
imported, the required priority classes configured, and the standard
priority class defined for the project/station. These steps have to be
performed once when generating a new station.
Import the SICAM CFC blocks into the block catalog by choosing
Options Block Types.
Enable Project in the Source group. An overview of the blocks that
can be imported is displayed in the left selection box.

CFC013.gif

Pic. 4-60 Block types... dialog box

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 111


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

Select the all blocks. This is the recommended procedure. However,


you can also make a partial selection, that is, just select the blocks
you require.
After selecting the blocks to be imported, click on the arrow in the
direction of the chart folder. The blocks are compiled during the import
process.
After the installation is complete, click on the Close button in the
Importing Blocks dialog box.

CFC014.gif

Pic. 4-61 Import blocks dialog box

112 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.11 Parameterizing CFC Blocks

Click on the Close button in the Block Types... dialog box.


After all blocks have been imported, you will see the catalog of block
families displayed in the right selection box of the CFC user interface.

CFC016.gif

Pic. 4-62 Catalog of CFC blocks after installation has been successfully completed

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 113


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.11.2 Configuring tasks

During graphic configuration with SICAM CFC blocks, the blocks are
assigned to certain priority classes.

Instructions as to which blocks you will need to configure for which


priority classes can be found in the description of the blocks in Section
Priority classes and in Chapter 2.1 of the manual SICAM SAS, Manual
SICAM plusTOOLS CFC Blocks /18/ or in the same place in the on-line
documentation if you click on
Start SICAM plusTOOLS CFC blocks manual.
These instructions must be observed.

Configuring Define the priority classes in CFC by choosing Options OB/


priority classes Priority Class.... A background priority class (OB1) is given by
default.
Rename OB1 to Backgrnd.
Enter the value 4096 in the Stack field and and confirm with
Accept.

cfc012.gif

Pic. 4-63 Configuring priority classes

114 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.11 Parameterizing CFC Blocks

Switch to the Software Interrupt tab card. Up to eight priority classes


can be specified for software interrupts.
Enter the name SW_Interr1 for the first priority class.
Enable the priority class by clicking on the Active check box.
Enter the value 4096 in the Stack field.
Confirm your input with OK.

cfc012b.gif

Pic. 4-64 Configuring priority classes for software interrupts

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 115


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.11.3 Defining the standard priority class

As CFC blocks are imported they are assigned to a priority class straight
away. You can automate this procedure by defining a priority class as
default priority class. In our example, we have chosen the SW_Interr1
priority class.
Open the Execution Order dialog box by choosing
Edit Execution Order....
Select the SW_Interr1 priority class.
Select Edit Predecessor for installation position.

cfc019.gif

Pic. 4-65 Defining the order of execution

A dialog box provides information on the selected priority class.


Confirm the message with OK.
Close the Execution order dialog box.

116 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.11 Parameterizing CFC Blocks

4.11.4 Parameterize the indication block

The following example shows you how to create a group indication from
several items of status information.

Selecting Open the container of the SICAM_INDICATION block family in the


and inserting block catalog.
a block
Select the AND_I block and drag-and-drop it onto the configuration
window of the CFC chart. The newly inserted block is highlighted.

CFC045.gif

Pic. 4-66 Inserting a CFC block

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 117


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

Specifying Select Number of I/Os... from the context menu.


I/Os
Enter the value 5 for five indications (I/Os) in the Number field.

cfc020.gif

Pic. 4-67 Specifying the number of I/Os

Close the Number of I/Os dialog box with OK.

Switching Position the cursor right next to the block.


between display
Double-click with the left mouse button. The block will be displayed
modes
magnified.

CFC045b.gif

Pic. 4-68 Sheet view display mode

118 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.11 Parameterizing CFC Blocks

Interconnecting Select the DW IN1 input.


a block

sas_046.gif

Pic. 4-69 Establishing the connection to the CFC variable

Select Connection to Operand... from the context menu. The Insert


interconnection to operand dialog box opens.

CFC046b.gif

Pic. 4-70 Linking the CFC variable

Click on the SIM Browser button.


Double-click on variable Status\DI\0\11 in the SIM Browser.
Click on OK in the context menu in the Insert Interconnection
to Operand... .

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 119


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

Assign input DW IN2 the CFC variable


Status\DI\0\12.biModule_unplugged from the SIM Tabelle.
Assign input DW IN3 the CFC variable
Status\CO\0\13.biModule_unplugged from the SIM Table.
Assign input DW IN4 the CFC variable
Status\CO\0\14.biModule_unplugged from the SIM Table.
Assign input DW IN5 the CFC variable
Status\CR\0\15.biModule_unplugged from the SIM Table.
Asssign the output of the link the CFC variable
20kV.biGroup_Ind1 from the SIM Table.

CFC046c.gif

Pic. 4-71 Interconnected CFC block AND_I

120 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.11 Parameterizing CFC Blocks

4.11.5 Parameterizing a command block (with command release)

The following example shows you how to parameterize process


feedback and command release for a command output.

Inserting a block Open the container of the SICAM_COMMAND block family in the
into the chart block catalog.
Select the PC block and drag-and-drop it into the configuration
window of the CFC chart. The newly inserted block is highlighted.
Select Object Properties... from the context menu. The Block
Object Properties dialog box opens.
Switch to the I/Os tab card.
Display the RELCTRL input by deactivating the check box in the Not
displayed column.

cfc022.gif

Pic. 4-72 Making I/Os visible

Close the Block Object Properties dialog box with OK.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 121


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

Parameterizing Switch to sheet view display mode.


blocks
Select the RELCTRL input.
Select Object Properties... from the context menu. The Properties -
Connection dialog box opens.
.

cfc024.gif

Bild 4-73 Parameterizing inputs

122 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.11 Parameterizing CFC Blocks

Enter a 1 in the Value box. This activates the command release


function through a CR module.

cfc024b.gif

Pic. 4-74 Parameterizing the RELCTRL input

Quit the Properties - I/O dialog box with OK.


Parameterize input PROC_FB with 1. This specifies command output
with process feedback.
Parameterize input COMMTERM with1. This specifies command
termination on receiving feedback.
Parameterize input OUTPUT_T with 600 ms. This specifies the
output time of the command.
Parameterize input CH_MON_T with 1 s. This specifies the feedback
monitoring time. The system then waits for process feedback for this
period.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 123


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

Interconnecting Select Connection to Operand... from the context menu. The Insert
a block Interconnection to Address dialog box opens.

CFC046b.gif

Pic. 4-75 Linking the CFC variable

Click on the SIM Browser button.


Double-click on variable 6kV\F3\CO\0\13\O01_0 in the SIM Browser.
Click on OK in the context menu in the Insert Interconnection
to Operand... .

cfc024c.gif

Bild 4-76 Interconnected PC CFC block with command release

124 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.11 Parameterizing CFC Blocks

4.11.6 Parameterizing the command block (without command release)

The following example shows you how to parameterize process


feedback for a command output.

Inserting a block Open the container of the SICAM_COMMAND block family in the
into the chart block catalog.
Select the PC block and drag-and-drop it into the configuration
window of the CFC chart. The newly inserted block is highlighted.
Select Object Properties... from the context menu. The Block
Object Properties dialog box opens.
Switch to the I/Os tab card (see picture 4-72).
Display the RELCTRL input by clicking on the check box in the Not
displayed column (see picture 4-72).
Close the Block Object Properties dialog box with OK.

Parameterizing Switch to Sheet view display mode. The default setting of the
blocks RELCTRL input is 0. That means that no command release is
parameterized through a CR module.
Select the PROC_FB input.
Select Object Properties... from the context menu. The Properties -
Connection dialog box opens (see picture 4-77).

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 125


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

Enter a 1 in the Value box. This specifies command output with


process feedback.
.

cfc025.gif

Pic. 4-77 Parameterizing the PROC_FB input

Quit the Properties - I/O dialog box with OK.


Parameterize input COMMTERM with1. This specifies command
termination on receiving feedback.
Parameterize the OUTPUT_T input with 600 ms. This specifies the
output time of the command.
Parameterize the CH_MON_T input with 1 s. This specifies the
feedback monitoring time. The system then waits for process
feedback for this period.

Interconnecting Select input di_IN in the CFC Chart.


a block
Select Interconnection to Operand from the context menu, click on
the SIM Browser button, and then double-click on information item
6kV\F3\CO\0\13\O00_0 in the SIM Browser

126 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.11 Parameterizing CFC Blocks

cfc025b.gif

Bild 4-78 Interconnected PC CFC block without command release

Quit the CFC processing by choosing Chart Exit.

Note:
Parameter changes in CFC blocks become effective immediately. It is
not necessary to save them explicitly!

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 127


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.12 Configuring a control center connection

The telecontrol links of the SICAM Substation Controller are configured


using the COM TC (Communication to Telecontrol Center) application.
COM TC manages all parameters that describe data exchange to and
from control centers.
You already created the connection to the control center when you
parameterized the COM 1 interface of the MCP communications
processor and specified IEC 60870-5-101 as the transmission protocol
(see page 69, Creating a connection to a control center).

4.12.1 Configuring control center IEC in the control direction

To configure the telegrams in the control direction for IEC 60870 5-101,
proceed as follows:
In the data pane of SIMATIC Manager, open the SIM Table with Open
in the context menu.
Switch to the Commands tab card and, in the TCC column, select all
the information that you require for communication with the control
center by clicking on Yes in the context menu.

sas912.gif

Pic. 4-79 SIM Table, Commands tab card

Save the parameterization by choosing Station Save.

128 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.12 Configuring a control center connection

Open COM TC.

sas820.gif

Pic. 4-80 COM TC

Open Control direction and enter the information addresses.

sas912a.gif

Pic. 4-81 Control center TCC IEC 60780-5-101, control direction

To exit the configuration in the control direction, click on


Station Close.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 129


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.12.2 Parameterizing control center IEC in the monitoring direction

To configure the telegrams in the monitoring direction for


IEC 60870 5-101, proceed as follows:
In the data pane of SIMATIC Manager, open the SIM Table with Open
in the context menu.
Switch to the Indications tab card and, in the TCC column, select all
the information items that you require for communication with the
control center by clicking on Yes in the context menu.

sas915.gif

Pic. 4-82 SIM Table, Indications tab card

In COM TC, open Monitoring direction and enter the Information


addresses.

sas915a.gif

Pic. 4-83 COM TC, monitoring direction

Exit by clicking on Station Close.

130 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.13 Telecontrol lists

4.13 Telecontrol lists

The telegrams in the monitoring direction are listed in telecontrol lists


with specific transmission procedures.
The Telecontrol List Catalog contains the following list types:
G Scan list
G Initiation buffer list
G Basic cycle list
G Telegram buffer list with time stamp:
G Telegram buffer list without time stamp:
G Subordinate basic cycle list
G Counter-controlled list
G Time-controlled list

Creating lists To insert transmission lists, proceed as follows:


Open the Lists container in the navigation pane.
Open the catalog with menu command Options Catalog.
Drag-and-drop the lists onto the Lists dialog box on the All tab card.

sas917.gif

Pic. 4-84 COM TC transmission lists

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 131


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.13.1 Assigning information

Switch to the Assignment tab card.


Assign the individual items of information to the lists with Yes in the
context menu or by entering X.

sas918.gif

Pic. 4-85 COM TC transmission lists, assignment of information

Save the parameterization by choosing Station Save.

Quitting COM TC Quit the COM TC application with Station Exit.

132 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.14 Completing configuration

4.14 Completing configuration

For error-free compilation of the example shown, you must complete the
configuration as follows:
Select the SIM symbol in the SIMATIC Manager. Open the
SIM Table by choosing Open Object from the context menu.
Open the Indications tab card in the SIM Table.
Create a link to the Human Machine Interface for all information items:
For example, enter Yes from the context menu in the HMI2 List
column for all information items.
Open the Commands tab card in the SIM Table.
Create a CFC variable for all information items in the CFC IN column
by choosing Create from the context menu. The system adds the
associated CFC variables in the CFC OUT column.
Create a link to the Human Machine Interface for all information items:
For example, enter Yes from the context menu in the HMI2 List
column for all information items.
Open the Measured Values tab card in the SIM Table.
Create a link to the Human Machine Interface for all information items:
For example, enter Yes from the context menu in the HMI Display
column for all information items.
Open the Metered Values tab card in the SIM Table.
Create a link to the Human Machine Interface for all information items:
For example, enter Yes from the context menu in the HMI Display
column for all information items.
Open the Status Information tab card in the SIM Table.
Create a link to the Human Machine Interface for all information items:
For example, enter Yes from the context menu in the HMI2 List
column for all information items.
Save all entries in the SIM Table by choosing
Station Save and quit the application with Station Exit.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 133


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

4.15 Compiling data

When compiling the data of your station, you must keep to the following
sequence:
G Compile in Hardware Configuration to specify the configuration of
SICAM SC.
G Compile in SIM, to specify
G Bay devices connection,
G Control center connection,
G Distribution of information to HMI,
G Distribution of information to CFC and
G Distribution of information to I/O modules.
G Compile in CFC, to specify
G CFC functions in the command direction (command output) and
G CFC functions in the monitoring direction (e.g. derived information).

Note:
To create system data blocks (SDBs) for the PROFIBUS FMS interface
of CP 443-5 Basic, proceed as follows after compilation in SIM:
Select the project in SIMATIC Manager and double-click on
PROFIBUS FMS Network in the data pane.
That opens the NETPRO application.
In the graphical representation of the network, select CPU.
Click on Network Save and Compile.... The Save and Compile
window appears.
Select the Compile and check all option and then click on OK. The
compilation and check is started.
Exit NETPRO by clicking on Network Exit.

134 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4.15 Compiling data

Compiling At the end of your demo configuration, carry out the following steps:
In the data pane of SIMATIC Manager, select SIM and start
compilation with Compile from the context menu.
Use NETPRO to create the system data blocks for the
PROFIBUS FMS communications processor.
Compile the CFC configuration.
In our example, the data of SICAM SC was already compiled during
hardware configuration.

Load the error-free compiled data into SICAM SC.

Note:
The exact procedure for loading the data into SICAM SC is described in
chapter 11.3.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 135


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
4 Getting Started

136 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Substation Controller 5
Contents 5.1 General Information on Hardware Configuration 138

5.2 General information about hardware parameterization 143

5.3 Operating functions of the Hardware Configuration application


146

5.4 Hardware Components 147

5.5 Parameterizing the CPU 153

5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly 155

5.7 Parameterizing a PROFIBUS FMS connection 187

5.8 Parameterizing a PROFIBUS DP connection 189

5.9 Parameterizing a DI module 192

5.10 Parameterizing a CO module 198

5.11 Parameterizing a CR module 201

5.12 Parameterizing AI modules 204

5.13 Parameterizing interface modules IM 207

5.14 Saving and compiling the hardware configuration 209

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 137


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

5.1 General Information on Hardware Configuration

Preliminary steps Before starting configuration, you should define the quantity listing, the
functionality, and the spatial distribution of the information items of your
substation automation system. That will determine the type and number
of modules required for your SICAM SC (for example, input/output or
communication module).
These definitions will serve as a basis for configuring and parameterizing
the Substation Controller using SICAM plusTOOLS.

Note:
Please note that the message number range 0 to 20000 is set by default.

Overview of
Hardware Configur Hardware Configuration Tab cards
ation Inserting a rack Defining
properties

Hardware Configuration Tab cards


Inserting a power Defining
supply module properties

Hardware Configuration Tab cards Parameter sheet


Placing Defining Parameterizing
a CPU properties

Hardware Configuration Tab cards Parameter sheet


Placing Defining Parameterizing
MCPs properties

Hardware Configuration Tab cards Parameter sheet


Placing CP 443- Defining Parameterizing
5 Basic properties

Hardware Configuration Tab cards Parameter sheet


Placing input/output Defining Parameterizing
modules properties

Expanding SICAM SAS with expansion rack, if required

Pic. 5-1 Substation controller configuration procedure (central rack)

138 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.1 General Information on Hardware Configuration

Expanding SICAM SAS with expansion rack, if required

Hardware Configuration Tab cards


Inserting an IM send Defining
module properties

Hardware Configuration Tab cards


Inserting a rack Defining
properties

Hardware Configuration Tab cards


Placing a PS power Defining
supply module properties

Hardware Configuration Tab cards


Inserting an IM Defining
receive module properties

Hardware Configuration Tab cards Parameter sheet


Placing further Defining Parameterizing
modules properties

Pic. 5-2 Substation controller configuration procedure (expansion rack)

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 139


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Calling the To call Hardware Configuration, proceed as follows:


Hardware Configur
Double-click on the Hardware icon.
ation
Hardware Configuration is started and the
Configure Hardware window opens.
Call up the Hardware Catalog with:
Insert Hardware Components or
View Catalog
The Catalog appears.

sas004.gif

Pic. 5-3 Hardware Configuration dialog box with the Hardware Catalog

140 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.1 General Information on Hardware Configuration

User-specific The user interface of the Hardware Configuration application can be


settings adapted to the individual needs of the user:
Call up the Customize window with Options Customize and
activate or deactivate the functions as required.

SAS202.gif

Pic. 5-4 Dialog box for customizing the


Hardware Configuration application

G Display object properties automatically on inserting


The dialog box for parameterizing the Hardware Properties appears
as soon as the module has been inserted in the rack.
G Enable Module Exchange
This function only refers to a replacement of the CPU.
If the function is enabled, you can substitute a different CPU for the
CPU configured. Simply drag a CPU from the Hardware Catalog and
drop it on the slot of the previous CPU. The system asks you whether
you really want to replace the CPU.
If the function is disabled, a fault indication is displayed informing you
that the slot is already occupied.
G Confirm Before Deleting Objects
Deletion of objects must be confirmed.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 141


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

G Display Configuration Tables


The racks are represented as configuration tables. Here you can
specify the default setting for the display size of the racks to be
inserted:
Minimize: corresponds to two rows (no slot visible)
Maximize: corresponds to full size (all slots visible)
Standard size: between minimum and optimum size

Note:
The default settings for Display Configuration Tables are only valid for
racks that will be newly inserted afterward.
Already configured module racks will always be display with the size with
which they have been created when HW Config is called up.
However, you can adapt the size of the configuration tables individually
by dragging them with the mouse pointer.

G Insert a rack
G Save object names in the target system
G Save Window Arrangement on Exit
When you reopen Hardware Configuration the window
arrangement appears as it did during your last session.
G Update hardware diagnosis cyclically.

142 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.2 General information about hardware parameterization

5.2 General information about hardware parameterization

The dialog boxes for parameterizing the properties of the hardware


components are arranged on the following tab cards:
G General
G Addresses
G Module-specific tab cards

To open the Properties dialog box, proceed as follows:


Open Hardware Configuration.
Double-click on a hardware component.
or
Select the module and open the Properties dialog box with Object
Properties in the context menu.

The standard tab cards General and Adresses are identical or similar for
various types of module.

General tab card In addition to the general information about the module, the General tab
card contains an text box Commentar for a description of eych module
of your SICAM SC.

SAS 104.gif

Pic. 5-5 General tab card, example

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 143


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Addresses tab card The Addresses tab card lets you define start addresses for specific
module signals (for example, inputs). These start addresses are
originally generated by the system, but can subsequently be modified by
the user. Automatic plausibility checks ensure the consistency of these
manually entered addresses.

Caution:
Please make sure that the start addresses for the inputs and outputs are
identical for the CR module.

SAS 105.gif

Pic. 5-6 Example of the Addresses tab card of a CR module

144 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.2 General information about hardware parameterization

Module- The Basic Parameters tab card is available for various modules. It
specific contains not only the Diagnostic alarm release but also module-specific
tab cards settings, such as parameterization of the signal inputs and outputs.
The Diagnosis alarm release must always be activated for function
modules DI, CO, CR, and AI so that SAS information items can be
created for the status indications of modules.

SAS 054.gif

Pic. 5-7 Basic Settings tab card for AI module, example

The other module-specific tab cards are described in detail in the


Chapters about parameterization of each module (see chapter 5.5 to
chapter 5.13).

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 145


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

5.3 Operating functions of the Hardware Configuration


application

Context menu Use the context menus provided by the user interface for the
Hardware Configuration application.

Copying The configuration and parameterization of the SICAM SC is optimized on


various levels by copy functions.
In this case, the entire parameter is applied.
Input/output modules or MCP assemblies more than one of which are
plugged can be reproduced using the Copy function.

Moving You can move modules from one slot to another or from one rack to
another using the drag-and-drop function.

Deleting Select a module from the rack and delete it via the context menu.

Note:
Please note that in each SICAM SC only:
G one CPU and
G one CR module can be plugged and
G one MCP assembly can be parameterized as the clock master. If
necessary, disable this function in the copied MCP assembly.
Please also ensure that each expansion rack is equipped with an
IM receive interface module and the central rack with an
IM send interface module!

146 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.4 Hardware Components

5.4 Hardware Components

5.4.1 Inserting modules general information

Select the hardware components of the Substation Controllers from the


Hardware Catalog of the Hardware Configuration application.
Proceed as follows:
In the SIMATIC 400 folder of the Hardware Catalog, open the
subfolder of the module you want to insert.
Select the slot.
Double-click on the hardware component in the Hardware Catalog.
The chosen module will be inserted in the selected slot.
or:
Select the desired component and copy it to the slot in the rack by
drag-and-drop.

Note:
Plausibility checks monitor the consistency of the assembly. Please also
observe the assembly rules, see chapter 1.3 and SICAM SAS Technical
Description /12/.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 147


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

5.4.2 Selecting hardware components

All the modules described in the SICAM SAS Technical Description /12/
are permitted with the maximum quantities of multiply pluggable modules
stated there. Each module is briefly described in the following sections.

Note:
Please observe the assembly rules for the modules as specified in:
G SICAM SAS Technical Description /12/ and
G SIMATIC S7/M7, Manual S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Logic
Controller Assembly, Module Data /2/.

Racks The Module rack (folder SIMATIC 400\Rack-400) must be equipped


with a C bus. You can choose between types UR1 with 18 slots and UR2
with 9 slots. Both can be used as a central rack or expansion rack.
A SICAM SC can be expanded with a maximum of 6 expansion racks.
The expansion racks can be connected to the central rack in series, in
parallel, or in a star.

148 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.4 Hardware Components

Interface The interface modules (SIMATIC 400 \ IM-400 folder) are used to
modules IM connect up to 6 expansion racks to the central rack. A send IM must be
plugged with a receive IM of the same type. The following types are
available:
G IM460-0 (transmitter) and IM461-0 (receiver) for a local link
G IM460-3 (transmitter) and IM461-3 (receiver) for a remote link
Both the send and the receive interface modules have two front
interfaces that are used to set up the connecting lines to the partner
modules. The following types of connection are possible for the individual
connecting lines:
G up to 4 expansion racks in series on one line
G each expansion rack through a separate send interface module
G a combination of these types.
Up to 6 send interface modules can be plugged into the central rack,
beginning with the last slot. The receive interface modules are plugged
into the last slot of each expansion rack.

Caution:
Pay attention to the overall connection length of the individual connecting
loops. That determines which interface modules are required:
G up to 3 m local link
G up to 120 m remote link

Power supply Two modules are available for the internal power supply PS
(SIMATIC 400\SICAM-400\PS-400 folder):
G PS DC 24-60 V
G PS UC 120-230 V
Each rack must be equipped with a power supply module of its own. It
must always be plugged into slot 1 and has a width of three slots, which
means that slots 2 and 3 are then no longer available.

CPU A SICAM SC cannot accommodate more than one CPU (SIMATIC 400
\ CPU-400 folder), which must be plugged into the central rack at the slot
in addition to the PS module. The CPU covers two slots.
The following CPU types are permissible:
G CPU 486-3 with Pentium 75
G CPU 488-3 with Pentium 120

IF964 To connect bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface, you can insert an
interface module IF964 in one of the two submodule slots of the CPU.
The number of connectable bay devices depends on the information

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 149


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

volume of the individual devices because the information is processed


through the PII process image.

CP 443 In SICAM SC, you can insert up to four PROFIBUS FMS interface
modules CP 443-5 Basic. The module is one slot wide and can be
inserted into any slot in the central rack.

MCP assembly In the SICAM SAS substation automation system, communication of the
Substation Controller with higher-levelcontrol centers, bay controllers,
and substations is implemented with communication modules that form a
single hardware unit, the MCP assembly.
An MCP assembly always consists of the MCP communications
processor and XC2 and/or XF6 expansion modules, if necessary.
The MCP communications processor and the XC2 expansion module
each have two external interfaces that can be operated with telecontrol,
bay device, or substation protocol.
The XF6 expansion module has six optical fiber cable interfaces that can
be operated using the bay device protocol.
A maximum of 6 MCP assemblies can be inserted in a substation
controller. Using 4 MCP assemblies, you can connect a maximum of
96 bay devices, 2 further MCP assemblies are provided for dual-
channel communication with up to 3 control centers.
Choose between:

G MCP0: MCP communications processor, without expansion


modules.
G MCP1: MCP communications processor and
one XC2 or XF6 expansion module.
G MCP2: MCP communications processor and
two XC2 or XF6 expansion modules.
G MCP3: MCP communications processor and
three XC2 or XF6 expansion modules.
G MCP4: MCP communications processor and
four XC2 or XF6 expansion modules.

You can combine the two expansion modules in one MCP assembly. An
MCP assembly occupies 1 to 5 slots.

150 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.4 Hardware Components

Input/output After plugging the basic modules, the input/output modules must be
modules configured. The SIMATIC 400\SICAM 400 folder of the
Hardware Catalog offers the following modules:
G AI module
Analog Input, folder: SIMATIC 400\SICAM-400\AI-400
G AI-C 16x12bit
16 x 12 bit current inputs
G AI-C 32x12bit
32 x 12 bit current inputs
G AI-V 16x12bit
16 x 12 bit voltage inputs
G AI-V 32x12bit
32 x 12 bit voltage inputs
G DI module
Digital Input, folder: SIMATIC 400\SICAM 400\DI-400
G DI 32xDC24/60V
32 inputs DC 24/60 V
G DI 32xDC110/125V
32 inputs DC 110/125 V
G CO module
Command Output, folder: SIMATIC 400\SICAM-400\CO-400
G CO 32xDC24/125V
32 single-pole commands or 16 double-pole commands/bit patterns
G CR module
Command Release, folder: SIMATIC 400\SICAM-400\CR-400.
G CR DC 24/60V
with output circuit monitoring, 8 inputs/8 outputs
G CR DC 110/125V
with output circuit monitoring, 8 inputs/8 outputs

Note:
You will find detailed descriptions of the modules in the SICAM SAS
Technical Description /12/ and in the manuals of each module.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 151


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

SICAM standard In the SICAM SC, all standard SIMATIC modules that are listed in the
modules SIMATIC 400\SM-400 folder can be used.

Note:
For a description of the standard SIMATIC modules, please refer
to the following documents:
SIMATIC M7, Technical Overview: The S7-400 Programmable Controller
- Configuration and Application /3/ and
SIMATIC S7/M7, Manual S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Logic
Controller Assembly, Module Data /2/.

5.4.3 Parameterizing hardware components

Parameterization of the hardware components of the SICAM SC


determines the quantity and type of information that is automatically
created by the system. This information is called SAS information and is
stored in the system under a hierarchical name.
For standard SIMATIC modules and modules that are operated in
process image mode (standard S7 mode), you will have to create and
link the items of SAS information manually. The procedure for that is
explained in chapter 9 and chapter 10.

Message numbers

Note:
On insertion of the CPU and the associated creation of the M7 program,
a number range from 1 to 20000 is assigned for the configured
indications. At the beginning of configuration, this range can be changed
as follows:
Select the CPU, M7 Program in the navigation pane of
SIMATIC Manager and then select Special Object Properties,
Message numbers from the context menu and enter the new number
range.
As soon as a message number has been used during parameterization,
it will no longer be possible to change the number range!
However, should you subsequently need more indications after
configuration, for example, due to implementation of additional bay
devices, please contact our hotline. You will then be told how to extend
the number range.

152 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.5 Parameterizing the CPU

5.5 Parameterizing the CPU

For complete parameterization of the CPU, the following tab cards are
provided:
G General
The MPI button lets you define external interfaces to a PC/PG or a
programming device or parameterize simple subnetworks.
G Startup
Defines the startup behavior of the SICAM SC on a cold and a warm
restart.
G Cycle / Clock Memory
Cyclic behavior of the CPU, such as cyclic updating of the process
image.
G Retentive Memory
Retentive memory ranges on power failure
G Protection
Access protection for certain data ranges
G Diagnostics/Clock
Defines the system diagnostics options, for example, displaying the
cause of a STOP.

Note:
Set the type of synchronization to As Slave on the Diagnosis/Clock tab
card because time synchronization of the SICAM SC is effected through
the MCP.
On the other tab cards, you can accept the default settings.

G Main memory
Main memory capacity of the CPU 16 Mbytes.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 153


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

SAS218.gif

Pic. 5-8 Diagnostics/Clock tab card of a CPU 488-3

154 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

Complete parameterization of the MCP assembly is carried out on the


following tab cards:
G General
G Addresses
G Basic Parameters
G Protocols
G Time
G Ports
The parameterization procedure is determined to a large extent by the
functionality of the MCP communications processor.
The MCP communications processor has an interface for external time
signal reception (DCF77 or GPS). The chosen receiver can influence the
parameterization of the MCP assembly.

Note:
We recommend using the GPS receiver specified in the
SICAM SAS/RTU Planning and Design /15/.
It does not occupy any of the internal channels nor any external interface
of the MCP communications processor.
In the Time parameters tab card, under Use SYNC input, select the
entry DCF77 for this GPS receiver.
When using another GPS receiver, COM1 and channel 6 of the MCP
communications processor are occupied by the system.

Note:
When parameterizing the MCP assembly, please stick to the
following order:
G Time parameters tab card
G Protocols tab card
G Ports tab cards
G Basic Parameters tab card
This avoids conflicts during the parameterization of
the communication interfaces.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 155


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

5.6.1 Time Parameters tab card

The Time parameters tab card defines the parameters of the interface
for external time signal reception of the MCP communications processor.

SAS 203.gif

Pic. 5-9 Time parameters tab card of the MCP assembly

Using the
SYNC input
G Without Without set time telegram
G DCF77 DCF77 signal of the German Federal
Institute of Physics and Metrology in
Braunschweig
G GPS GPS signal via satellite
G Ext. SYNC pulse 1 Min Edge change of the input signal at 1-
minute intervals
G Ext. SYNC pulse 10 Min Edge change of the input signal at 10-
minute intervals

Note:
Clock control must not be assigned to more than one MCP assembly
within the SICAM SC.

156 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

5.6.2 Basic Parameters tab card

In the Basic Parameters tab card of the MCP assembly, you can
parameterize
G the external interfaces of the MCP communications processor and
G type and number of the expansion modules
in the MCP assembly.

SAS 207.gif

Pic. 5-10 Basic Parameters tab card of the MCP1

Enable Diagnosis alarm release if you want the fault events of the MCP
assembly to be evaluated by the CPU.
The Reaction to CPU STOP text box lets you specify if, in the event of a
CPU STOP, the communications processor will also be set to STOP
(entry STOP) or whether it should continue operating
(entry Continue).
The Define Connection section lets you specify the parameters of the
two external interfaces, COM1 and COM2.

Interface G RS232 (also for TCP/IP with converter)


standards
G RS485 (also for X21 interface)

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 157


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Assigned channels Internal channel numbers Channel 1 to Channel 6, depending on the


specified interface standard and the intended use of the interface.
Telecontrol protocols
G IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC),
G TCP/IP (for IEC 60870-5-104),
G SINAUT 8-FW (COM TC) and
G DNP V3.00 (COM TC)
require interface standard RS232.
G IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC),
G TCP/IP (for IEC 60870-5-104)
can also be operated with interface standard X21 (RS485),
G SINAUT 8-FW (COM TC) also with RS422 (RS485).

Bay controller protocols


G IEC 60870-5-103 (COM IED) and
G DNP V3.00 (COM IED)
require interface standard RS485 or an FO interface.

Note:
With protocol IEC 60870-5-103 the MCP channels 5 and 6 cannot be set
to interface standard RS485.

The protocol for substation connection


G IEC 60870-5-101 (COM IED)
requires interface standard RS232.

Assign the channels in accordance with the definition specified on the


Protocols tab card.

158 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

Expansion In the Hardware extensions group box, specify which expansion


modules modules are used in the MCP assembly.
The XC2 expansion module has the interfaces COM1 andCOM2, which
can be parameterized as an RS232 or as an RS485 interface.
The XF6 expansion module has the fiber optic interfaces COM1 to
COM6.
With the Parameterization button, select the Properties tab card
of the XC2 or XF6 expansion module for detailed parameterization.
Assignment of the interface standards and the internal channels to the
parameterized transmission protocols is made in the same way as for the
COM1 and COM2 interfaces of the MCP module on the Basic
Parameters tab card, Connection definition group box.
For the XF6 expansion module, no interface standard needs to be
specified.

Expansion
module XC2

SAS 208.gif

Pic. 5-11 XC2 tab card, module of the MCP1

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 159


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Expansion
modules XF6

SAS 209.gif

Pic. 5-12 XF6 tab card, module of the MCP2

The interfaces of the XF6 expansion modules must not be assigned to


any channels that to which telecontrol protocols have been assigned.
.

Note:
You will find a description of each module of the MCP assembly
in SICAM SAS Technical Description /12/.

160 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

5.6.3 Protocols tab card

Communication to bay devices and to higher-level control centers is


managed internally on six channels of the MCP communications
processor.
The Protocols tab card lets you specify the transmission protocol for
each processing channel.

sas210.gif

Pic. 5-13 Protocols tab card of an MCP assembly

Selection of the transmission protocol is channel-specific.


The protocols SINAUT 8-FW (COM TC) with PDM and TCP/IP can only
be imlemented on channel 1 to channel 4.
Channels with telecontrol protocels assigned to them must not be
assigned to any interfaces of the XF6 expansion modules.
Connection of a SICAM SC to higher-level control centers can be carried
using no more than two different telecontrol protocols.
Channels with bay device protocols are multiplex-capable, that is, they
can route the processing of data of several external interfaces to one
channel.

Note:
Always select the highest possible baud rate to ensure optimum system
performance.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 161


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Select the protocol-specific Properties dialog box for detailed


parameterization of the transmission protocols with the Parameterize
button.

Protocol
IEC 60870-5-101
(COM TC)

sas701.gif

Pic. 5-14 Properties of IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC), Protocols tab card

Note:
Use the Create button to select the remote terminal interface to a higher-
level control center. You will find further instructions on how to
parameterize the control center connection in chapter 7.

162 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

In group box Protocol layers, Bit transmission layer (= physical


layer), click on the Parameter button to select the dialog box.

sas703.gif

Pic. 5-15 Physical layer IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC)

Click on the Advanced parameters button to make specific changes.

sas704.gif

Pic. 5-16 Advanced parameters of the bit transmission layer (= physical layer)
IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC)

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 163


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Note:
Changes in the Advanced parameters dialog box require special
knowledge of telecontrol technology and should therefore only be made
by appropriately qualified personnel.

In group box Protocol layers, Data link layer, click on the


Parameter button to select the dialog box.

sas705.gif

Pic. 5-17 Data link layer IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC)

Click on the Advanced parameters button to make specific changes.

164 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

sas706.gif

Pic. 5-18 Advanced parameters of the data link layer


IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC)

Note:
Changes in the Advanced parameters dialog box require special
knowledge of telecontrol technology and should therefore only be made
by appropriately qualified personnel.

Switch to the Channel info tab card in dialog box Properties of


IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC).

sas702.gif

Pic. 5-19 Properties of IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC), Channel info tab card

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 165


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Protocol
SINAUT 8-FW
(COM TC)

sas711.gif

Pic. 5-20 Properties of SINAUT 8-FW (COM TC), Protocols tab card

Note:
Use the Create button to select the remote terminal interface to a higher-
level control center. You will find further instructions on how to
parameterize the control center connection in chapter 7.

166 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

In group box Protocol layers, Bit transmission layer (= physical


layer), click on the Parameter button to select the dialog box.

sas710.gif

Pic. 5-21 Properties of the physical layer SINAUT 8-FW (COM TC)

Click on the Advanced parameters button.

sas713.gif

Pic. 5-22 Advanced parameters of the bit transmission layer (= physical layer)
SINAUT 8-FW (COM TC)

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 167


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Note:
Changes in the Advanced parameters dialog box require special
knowledge of telecontrol technology and should therefore only be made
by appropriately qualified personnel.

In group box Protocol layers, Data link layer, click on the


Parameter button to select the dialog box.

sas712.gif

Pic. 5-23 Properties of the data link layer SINAUT 8-FW (COM TC)

168 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

TCP/IP protocol If communication with the higher-level control center is performed using
the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol, set the TCP/IP protocol on the Protocol
tab card of your MCP assembly for the channel in question.
Create the associated remote terminal connection on the Ports tab card
of the MCP assembly (see chapter 5.6.4).
The following example shows the dual-channel configuration with the
appropriate address settings for channels, subnetworks, routers, and
ports.

IEC 60870-5-104 IEC 60870-5-104 IEC 60870-5-104

Port 2404 Port 2405 Port 2406

MCP
TCP/IP

PPP channel1 PPP channel1


192.168.1.1 192.168.2.1
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

Uart Uart

Subnet Subnet 2
DEFAULT 192.168.2.0

Router 1 Router 2
192.168.1.2 192.168.2.2

WAN

NLS1 NLS2
192.168.1.17 192.168.2.17

Pic. 5-24 Parameterization of TCP/IP, example of dual-channel configuration

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 169


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Click on the Protocols tab card of the MCP assembly on the


Parameter button.

sas410.gif

Pic. 5-25 Properties of the TCP/IP (for protocol IEC 60870-5-104)

The structure of the Channel info tab card is identical with the channel
info tab card of the IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC) protocol (see Properties
of IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC), Channel info tab card page 165.).
In the Protocol layers, Bit transmission layer (= physical layer)
group box, click on the Parameter button.

sas411.gif

Pic. 5-26 Properties of the TCP/IP physical layer


(for protocol IEC 60870-5-104)

170 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

Click on the Advanced parameters button to make specific changes.

sas412.gif

Pic. 5-27 Properties of the TCP/IP, advanced parameters for physical layer (for
protocol IEC 60870-5-104)

Note:
Changes in the Advanced parameters dialog box require special
knowledge of telecontrol technology and should therefore only be made
by appropriately qualified personnel.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 171


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

In group box Protocol layers, Data link layer, click on the


Parameter button to select the dialog box.

sas413.gif

Pic. 5-28 Properties of the TCP/IP data link layer


(for protocol IEC 60870-5-104)

Enter the IP addresses of the channel and the partner and modify the
advanced parameters if necessary.

sas414.gif

Pic. 5-29 Properties of the TCP/IP, advanced parameters for data link layer (for
protocol IEC 60870-5-104)

172 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

Switch to the routing table.

sas416.gif

Pic. 5-30 Properties of the TCP/IP, Routing table tab card


(for protocol IEC 60870-5-104)

Click on the Add button. Use the Standard route, confirm the default
setting for the Subnet address and Subnet mask with OK.
Click on the Add button again if you want to parameterize a second
network or change the default settings.

sas415.gif

Pic. 5-31 Properties of the TCP/IP, Routing table entry


(for protocol IEC 60870-5-104)

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 173


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Enter the address parameters. You will find information in the


example (Bild 5-24), the on-line help, and in the TCP/IP protocol
description.

Protocol
DNP V3.00
(COM TC)

sas610.gif

Pic. 5-32 Properties of DNP V3.00 (COM TC), Protocols tab card

The structure of the Channel info tab card is identical with the channel
info tab card of the IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC) protocol (see Properties
of IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC), Channel info tab card page 165.).

174 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

In the Protocol layers, Bit transmission layer group box, click on


the Parameter button.

sas611.gif

Pic. 5-33 Physical layer DNP V3.00 (COM TC),


Basic parameters tab card

Make your settings and check the advanced parameters if necessary.

sas612.gif

Pic. 5-34 Advanced parameters for the bit transmission layer (= physical layer)
DNP V3.00 (COM TC)

Changes in the Advanced parameters dialog box require special


knowledge of telecontrol technology and should therefore only be carried
out by appropriately qualified personnel.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 175


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Select the Profile transmitter tab card.

sas613.gif

Pic. 5-35 Bit transmission layer (= physical layer) DNP V3.00 (COM TC),
Profile transmitter tab card

sas614.gif

Pic. 5-36 Advanced parameters for the bit transmission layer (= physical layer)
DNP V3.00 (COM TC),
Profile transmitter tab card

Changes in the Advanced parameters dialog box require special


knowledge of telecontrol technology and should therefore only be made
by appropriately qualified personnel.

176 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

sas615.gif

Pic. 5-37 Physical layer DNP V3.00 (COM TC),


Profile receiver tab card

sas616.gif

Pic. 5-38 Advanced parameters for the bit transmission layer (= physical layer)
DNP V3.00 (COM TC),
Profile receiver tab card

Changes in the Advanced parameters dialog box require special


knowledge of telecontrol technology and should therefore only be made
by appropriately qualified personnel.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 177


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

In group box Protocol layers, Data link layer, click on the


Parameter button to select the dialog box and set the Station
number and Length of telegram buffer.

sas617.gif

Pic. 5-39 Data link layer DNP V3.00 (COM TC)

Protocol
TELEGYR 800
(COM TC)

sas420.gif

Pic. 5-40 Properties of TELEGYR 800 (COM TC), Protocols tab card

The structure of the Channel info tab card is identical with the channel
info tab card of the IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC) protocol (see Properties
of IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC), Channel info tab card page 165.).

178 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

In group box Protocol layers, Bit transmission layer (= physical


layer), click on the Parameter button to select the dialog box.

sas421.gif

Pic. 5-41 Bit transmission layer (= physical layer) TELEGYR 800 (COM TC),
Basic Parameters tab card

The structure of the Profile transmitter and Profile receiver tab cards
is identical with the tab cards of the DNP V3.00 (COM TC) protocol (see
Bit transmission layer (= physical layer) DNP V3.00 (COM TC), Profile
transmitter tab card page 176.).
Make your parameter settings and click on the Advanced
Parameters button.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 179


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

sas423.gif

Pic. 5-42 Advanced parameters for the bit transmission layer (= physical layer)
TELEGYR 800 (COM TC)

Note:
Changes in the Advanced parameters dialog boxes require special
knowledge of telecontrol technology and should therefore only be made
by appropriately qualified personnel.

180 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

In group box Protocol layers, Data link layer, click on the


Parameter button to select the dialog box.

sas426.gif

Pic. 5-43 Data link layer TELEGYR 800 (COM TC),

Enter the address parameters.

Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103
(COM IED)

sas720.gif

Pic. 5-44 Properties of IEC 60870-5-103 (COM IED), Protocols tab card

Select the transmission rate.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 181


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

The structure of the Channel info tab card is identical with the channel
info tab card of the IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC) protocol (see Properties
of IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC), Channel info tab card page 165.).

Protocol DNP V3.00


(COM IED)

sas640.gif

Pic. 5-45 Properties of DNP V3.00 (COM IED), Protocols tab card

Select the transmission rate.


The structure of the Channel info tab card is identical with the channel
info tab card of the IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC) protocol (see Properties
of IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC), Channel info tab card page 165.).

182 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

Protocol IEC 60870- To connect substations to your SICAM SC use the IEC 60870-5-
5-101 (COM IED) 101 (COM IED) protocol.

sas430.gif

Pic. 5-46 Properties of IEC 60870-5-101 (COM IED), Protocols tab card

The structure of the Physical layer tab card is identical with the channel
info tab card of the IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC) protocol (see Physical
layer IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC) page 163.).
In group box Protocol layers, Data link layer, click on the
Parameter button to select the dialog box.

sas431.gif

Pic. 5-47 Data link layer of protocol IEC 60870-5-101 (COM IED)

Switch to the IEC 60870-5-101 (COM IED) tab card in the Properties

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 183


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

dialog box.

sas432.gif

Pic. 5-48 Properties of IEC 60870-5-101 (COM IED),


IEC 60870-5-101 (COM IED) tab card

The other parameter settings are made during parameterization of the


substation connection in the COM IED application in the control and
monitoring directions.

184 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.6 Parameterizing the MCP assembly

5.6.4 Ports tab card

Use the service-oriented protocol TCP/IP, define the port objets required
for it on the Ports tab card of the MCP assembly.

sas417.gif

Pic. 5-49 Ports tab card of an MCP assembly

Click the Add button to create a port object.

sas418a.gif

Pic. 5-50 Properties of Ports of an MCP assembly


Basic parameters tab card

Enter the port number and number of telegrams.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 185


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Click on the Create button to create a remote terminal connection


TCC IEC 60870-5-104.

sas418.gif

Pic. 5-51 Properties of Ports of an MCP assembly


Basic parameters tab card

sas419.gif

Pic. 5-52 Properties of Ports of an MCP assembly


Timeout parameters tab card

Enter the timeout parameters. The following must apply:


T2 < T1 < T3.

186 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.7 Parameterizing a PROFIBUS FMS connection

5.7 Parameterizing a PROFIBUS FMS connection

The communications processor CP 443-5 Basic lets you implement


connection of bay devices or WinCC on PROFIBUS FMS.

Note:
Only insert the PROFIBUS FMS interfaces CP 443-5 Basic into the
central rack of SICAM SC.

Complete parameterization of the PROFIBUS interface


CP 443-5 Basic is effected on tab card:
G General
Use the PROFIBUS button to assign the module a station address
and change the properties of the associated subnetwork (see
chapter 4.4.4).
G Addresses
G Options
specifies the clock synchronization.
G Communication variables
Specifies if the system data for the communication variables are to be
updated during compilation.
G Diagnosis
Starts the NCM S7 PROFIBUS diagnostics for PROFIBUS CP.

Note
You will find further details on how to parameterize the PROFIBUS
interface
CP 443-5 Basic in the documentation SIMATIC NET, Manual NCM S7
for PROFIBUS for STEP7 V5 /21/.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 187


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

CP tab card
Properties

SAS601.gif

Pic. 5-53 General tab card of a CP 443-5 Basic

Click on the Properties button to check the settings of the


PROFIBUS FMS interface.

sas604.gif

Pic. 5-54 Properties of PROFIBUS FMS interface

188 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.8 Parameterizing a PROFIBUS DP connection

5.8 Parameterizing a PROFIBUS DP connection

Connection of bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface can be


implemented in SICAM SAS using the IF964 interface module. It is
plugged into one of the two interface slots of the CPU.
Proceed as follows:
In the Hardware Catalog, select
SIMATIC 400/M7 Extention/IF Submodule/IF 964-DP and drag the
interface module onto IF1 of the CPU.

sas1002a.gif

Pic. 5-55 Insert the IF964 interface module for PROFIBUS DP

Note:
The procedure for inserting a bay device with
PROFIBUS DP interface is described in chapter 6.8.
The extension of the hardware catalog with additional bay device types
is described in chapter .

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 189


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Properties
IF 964-DP

sas603.gif

Pic. 5-56 Properties of PROFIBUS DP interface

Click on the New... button to define a subnet for


PROFIBUS-DP.

sas603a.gif

Properties of PROFIBUS DP interface, General tab card


Switch to the Network settings tab card.

190 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.8 Parameterizing a PROFIBUS DP connection

sas510.gif

Pic. 5-57 Properties of PROFIBUS, selecting the transmission rate

Select the Transmission rate and confirm with OK.


Check in the settings made in the Properties IF964-DP window,
General tab card, Interface group box.

sas602.gif

Pic. 5-58 Properties of IF 964-DP

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 191


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

5.9 Parameterizing a DI module

For a complete parameterization of a DI module, the following tab cards


of the Object properties are available:
G General (General tab card see page 143)
G Addresses (Addresses tab card see page 144)
G Basic Parameters

Tab cards To parameterize the Basic Parameters tab card, proceed as follows:
Basic Parameters
Activate the Diagnosis alarm release.
Assign the desired indication types.

SAS 210a.gif

Pic. 5-59 Basic Parameters tab card of the DI module

With the Parameter button, you can open the tab cards for a detailed
definition of the input groups. A separate tab card is provided for each
indication type.

Note:
Disable unused inputs/outputs to minimize the data volume.
The inputs/outputs can be enabled again at any time without affecting
data already parameterized.

Indication types The 32 inputs of the DI module are combined in groups of 8 inputs each.

192 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.9 Parameterizing a DI module

You must assign an indication type to each group and parameterize it


specifically with the Parameter button.
The following message types are available:
G Single-point indication
G Fleeting indication
G Double-point indication
G Bit pattern indication
Additional input groups will be assigned functionally, depending on
the parameterized bit pattern length.
G Transformer tap indication
G Metered value capturing
G State capturing
This is the S7 default setting (process image mode). No SAS
information items are created.

Single-point
indication

SAS 064.gif

Pic. 5-60 Single-point Indication tab card of the DI module

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 193


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Fleeting indication

SAS 065.gif

Pic. 5-61 Fleeting Indication tab card of the DI module

Double-point
indication

SAS 066.gif

Pic. 5-62 Double-point Indication tab card of the DI module

194 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.9 Parameterizing a DI module

Bit pattern
indication

SAS 067.gif

Pic. 5-63 Bit Pattern Indication tab card of the DI module

Transformer tap
indication

Sas069.gif

Pic. 5-64 Transformer Tap Indication tab card of the DI module

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 195


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Metered value
capturing

SAS 068.gif

Pic. 5-65 Parameter tab card, Metered value capturing, DI module

Note:
If the Freeze Triggering via CPU job option is enabled on the Metered
Value Capturing tab card, the associated freeze command for DI
modules with parameterized metered value capturing is automatically
generated when the hardware configuration is saved.

196 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.9 Parameterizing a DI module

Status capturing

Sas069a.gif

Pic. 5-66 Parameter tab card, Status capturing, DI module

Note:
You will find further details on how to parameterize the various indication
types in the manual SICAM, Manual Digital Input Function Module DI32
/9/.

After parameterization, the Activate parameters


dialog box might appear.

SAS 211.gif

Pic. 5-67 Activate parameters dialog box

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 197


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

5.10 Parameterizing a CO module

The complete parameterization of the CO modules is carried out on the


following tab cards:
G General (General tab card see page 143)
G Addresses (Addresses tab card see page 144)
G Basic Parameters

Output types The output type determines tripping of the downstream load
disconnecting relays. The following output types are available:
G Digital output
is selected for persistent commands and digital setpoint values.
The module is then operated in process image mode, that is, only the
status indications of the module, but no SAS information for command
outputs, are created using SICAM plusTOOLS (see chapter 10).
G 1-pole 32 outputs
G 2-pole 16 outputs
G 1 1/2-pole with internal release 32 outputs

Note:
When setting the output type, you must take into consideration whether
the CO module is operated together with the CR module or not, as the
CR module has an additive effect on the output type.
1-pole + CR 1-pole tripping of the downstream
load disconnecting relays with checks
1-pole without CR 1-pole tripping of the downstream
load disconnecting relays without checks
2-pole + CR 2-pole tripping of the downstream
load disconnecting relays with checks.
2-pole without CR 2-pole tripping of the downstream
load disconnecting relays without checks.

198 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.10 Parameterizing a CO module

Tab cards Parameterize the Basic Parameters tab card as follows:


Basic Parameters
Enable Diagnosis alarm release.
Select the desired output type.

SAS 052.gif

Pic. 5-68 Basic Parameters tab card of the CO module

Parameterizing the To parameterize the 16 outputs of the CO module, proceed as follows:


outputs
Click on the Parameterization button.

Sas052a.gif

Pic. 5-69 Parameterization of outputs tab card, CO module

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 199


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Assign the command types single- or double commands (SC or DC)


to the outputs. Please observe that this assignment is always made in
groups of two and that you can assign a command type to even-
numbered outputs only
(0 is also an even number):
SC results in SC automatically being assigned to the odd-numbered
adjacent output as well.
DC results in FA (Functionally Assigned) being automatically
assigned to the odd-numbered adjacent output.
Disable unused outputs to reduce the number of SAS information
items.

Note:
To output transformer tap commands, define double commands.

Note:
You will find detailed explanations of the value ranges of the various
parameters in the manual SICAM, Manual Command Output Function
Module CO32 /10/.

Note:
If you use standard modules for the output of setpoint values or persistent
commands, you must create the status information for the modules as
well as the SAS information for the commands. Instructions on how to do
that can be found in chapter 10.

200 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.11 Parameterizing a CR module

5.11 Parameterizing a CR module

For complete parameterization of the CR module, the following tab cards


will be available:
G General (General tab card see page 143)
G Addresses (Addresses tab card see page 144)
The start addresses of the inputs and outputs must be the same!
G Basic Parameters

Tab cards Parameterize the Basic Parameters tab card as follows:


Basic Parameters
Activate the Diagnosis alarm release.
Assign the following indication type to the inputs:
The output type which is pre-assigned to the 8 outputs is Digital output.

SAS 053.gif

Pic. 5-70 Basic Parameters tab card of the CR module

With the Parameter button, you can open the tab cards for detailed
parameterization of the input groups. The registers are different for each
type of indication.
Disable all unassigned inputs.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 201


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

Note:
The outputs of the CR module can be operated in process image mode
only. No SAS information items are created on parameterizing the
module. You need to create and link the information manually in der
MIM Table (see chapter 10.3).

Single-point
indication

SAS 070.gif

Pic. 5-71 Single-point Indication tab card of the CR module

Fleeting indication

SAS 096.gif

Pic. 5-72 Fleeting Indication tab card of the CR module

202 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.11 Parameterizing a CR module

State capturing

Sas096a.gif

Pic. 5-73 State capturing tab card, CR module

Note:
State capturing is the S7 default setting (process image mode). No
SAS information items are created.

Note:
You will find further details on how to parameterize the various indication
types in the manual SICAM, Manual Command Release Function
Module CR /11/.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 203


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

5.12 Parameterizing AI modules

The complete parameterization of the AI modules is carried out on the


following tab cards:
G General (General tab card see page 143)
G Addresses (Addresses tab card see page 144)
G Basic Parameters
G Inputs

Tab cards Parameterize the Basic Parameters tab card as follows:


Basic Parameters
Activate the Diagnosis alarm release.
Match the input range to your hardware.

AI-C module

SAS 054.gif

Pic. 5-74 Basic Parameters tab card of the AI-C module

204 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.12 Parameterizing AI modules

AI-V module

SAS 213.gif

Pic. 5-75 Basic Parameters tab card of the AI-V module

Inputs For each input, you must specify the following parameters:
G Measuring range
G Zero point suppression
G Threshold value of the event buffer entry
must be activated, otherwise no SAS information will be created.

AI-C module

SAS 071.gif

Pic. 5-76 Inputs tab card of the AI-C module

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 205


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

AI-V module

SAS 214.gif

Pic. 5-77 Inputs tab card AI-V module

Note:
You will find further details on how to parameterize the inputs in the
manual SICAM, Manual Analog Input Function Module AI32/16 /8/.

206 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.13 Parameterizing interface modules IM

5.13 Parameterizing interface modules IM

The following tab cards are available for parameterizing an IM module:


G General (General tab card see page 143)
G Addresses (Addresses tab card see page 144)
G Connection

Tab cards Each send interface module has two interfaces. These connectors are
Connection used to connect the expansion racks of the same type with star or
cascaded topology.
Parameterize the Connection tab card as follows:
Select a rack from the Unconnected Racks list and click the
Connect button of the desired interface.

SAS 055.gif

Pic. 5-78 Connection tab card, IM module

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 207


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

sas216.gif

Pic. 5-79 Hardware configuration after connection of the IM modules

In the Hardware Configuration window, the connecting line is


represented graphically by a line.

208 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5.14 Saving and compiling the hardware configuration

5.14 Saving and compiling the hardware configuration

Before you quit the Hardware Configuration application, save your


configuration with the menu command Station Save. The parameters
of the modules and the bay devices with a PROFIBUS DP interface are
saved in the database.
The menu command Station Save and Compile writes the
parameters of the modules and the bay devices with PROFIBUS DP
interface to the database, creates the system data blocks SDB 400, the
SAS information, and the containers:
G CPU
Configuration of the automation functions with CFC and the
bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface.
G MCP
Parameters of the communication modules
G CP
Parameters of the PROFIBUS FMS interface

Note:
The parameterization data that have been compiled and prepared for
downloading to the target device are called system data blocks SDB 400.

You must always save and compile when:


G the hardware configuration has been changed.
G the parameterization data of the CPU have been changed.
Compilation is logged step by step in the SICAM Report, any errors that
occur can be located easily that way (see chapter 11.2).

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 209


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
5 Substation Controller

210 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Bay Device / Substation Connection 6
Contents 6.1 General 212

6.2 Inserting bay devices from the catalog 217

6.3 Bay device properties 218

6.4 SIPROTEC 4 devices with a PROFIBUS FMS interface 222

6.5 Display sorted SAS information of the bay devices 228

6.6 Selecting the information volume of bay devices 231

6.7 Copying Bay Devices 232

6.8 Bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface 233

6.9 Substation connection 238

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 211


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

6.1 General

Bay devices Use the COM IED application (Communication to Intelligent Electronic
Devices) of the SICAM plusTOOLS configuration system to integrate bay
devices with
G IEC 60870-5-103,
G PROFIBUS FMS
G DNP V3.00 (IED)
interfaces in the SICAM SAS substation automation system. To do that,
transfer the bay devices from a catalog and determine the functional
scope and information volume of the devices by parameterizing their
version numbers.
On SIPROTEC 4 units connected with PROFIBUS FMS, you will define
the scope of function and information with DIGSI 4 and import this
parameterization into SICAM plusTOOLS.
Bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interfaces are integrated and managed
in the hardware configuration (see chapter 5.8 and chapter 6.8).

Substations Substations can be connected to a SICAM SC that can communicate


with the SICAM SC using the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol. These include
not only the SICAM products RTU, mini RTU, micro RTU, and
SINAUT LSA, but also substations of other manufacturers and lower-
level SICAM SCs.
Substation connections are also inserted from the catalog and managed
in COM IED.

212 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.1 General

SIMATIC Manager
Starting the
COM IED

COM IED COM IED COM IED


Opening the catalog Selecting/inserting Inserting a
bay devices substation

COM IED
Inserting
COM IED and
COM IED parameterizing
information in the
Defining control
properties

COM IED
SIM Browser Inserting and
Defining the parameterizing
information volume information in the
control

Pic. 6-1 COM IED, configuration procedure, bay device / substation


connection

COM IED container After configuration has been completed, the COM IED container will
contain all the inserted bay devices. The scope of information is defined
on a case-by-case basis during configuration. It also contains all
configured items of information of the substation connections.

sas023.gif

Pic. 6-2 COM IED, protection unit 7SA511, example

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 213


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

The catalog The catalog of the COM IED application contains the substation
connection TCS IEC 60870-5-101 and all bay devices that can be
integrated.
The bay devices are grouped into hierarchically structured groups:
G Bay controllers (IEC 60870-5-103 (COM IED))
G Bay controllers (PROFIBUS FMS)
G Bay controllers (DNP V3.00 (COM IED))
G Protection units
G SIPROTEC 4 devices (only if DIGSI 4 is installed)
G Other devices (e.g. freely definable device)

Opening the Open the catalog with menu command Options Catalog.
catalog

SAS 073.gif

Pic. 6-3 Catalog, example of bay devices that can be integrated

A short description is displayed for the selected bay device at the bottom
of the catalog.

The Catalog is updated with each new version of the SICAM plusTOOLS
configuration system.

214 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.1 General

Freely definable If you want to integrate a bay device with the IEC 60870-5-103 or
devices DNP V3.00 protocol that is not contained in the catalog, you can insert a
Freely definable device for which you can then insert and link all
necessary information manually.
Proceed as follows:
Insert a device from the folder of the Catalog Bay
devices\Other devices\Third-party manufacturer (IEC 60870-5-
103) (see chapter 6.2).
Parameterize the device (see chapter 6.3).
Create all the required SAS information (analog chapter 6.8.2).

Bay devices with Bay devices with a PROFIBUS DP interface are not contained in the
PROFIBUS DP Catalog. These bay devices are inserted during hardware
interface configuration. Instructions on how to do that can be found in chapter 5.8
and chapter 6.8.
If you want to use a device that is not yet contained in the Hardware
Catalog you can extend the catalog. The procedure for this is explained
using the example of a SIMEAS Q.
With the measuring block of the device, you will receive a DSF (device-
specific file) file that contains all the properties for a DP slave. By
integrating the DSF file for SIMEAS Q, you can extend the hardware
catalog in the SIMATIC Manager by the PROFIBUS slave SIMEAS Q.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 215


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

DSF file The DSF floppy disk contains the file


Installing
G SIEM80B1.GSD
with the device-specific data of the SIMEAS Q device.
G 7KG8000n.BMP
G 7KG8000s.BMP
The device-specific files are used for the graphic representation of the
SIMEAS Q slaves on the PROFIBUS system.

To install the device in the hardware catalog, proceed as follows:


In the HW Config window, select the menu command Options Install
New DSF.
The Install New DSF dialog box opens.
Switch to the demo floppy disk that contains the DSF files.
Select the SimQ1653.GSD file, and click on the Open button.
The DSF file is installed in SIMATIC Manager.
Select menu item Options Update Catalog.
The hardware catalog is updated with the new hardware components. It
contains the new entry SIMEAS Q in the PROFIBUS DP Other Bay
Devices Other folder.
You can now use this entry to assign the hardware component
SIMEAS Q to PROFIBUS as a slave.

216 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.2 Inserting bay devices from the catalog

6.2 Inserting bay devices from the catalog

To insert a device from the catalog, proceed as follows:


Select the COM IED symbol in the data pane
of SIMATIC Manager.
Open the application by choosing Open Object from the context
menu or with Edit Open Object.
Open the catalog with menu command Options Catalog.
Select a bay device from the catalog and drag-and-drop it onto the
COM IED icon.

The bay device is displayed at the hierarchical level below the COM IED
icon.
Change the designation of the bay device by giving it a project-
specific, unique name.

SAS021.gif

Pic. 6-4 COM IED and Catalog

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 217


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

6.3 Bay device properties

Project-specific parameterization of the bay devices is carried out on


parameter sheetProperties.
It is divided into the following tab cards:
G General
The contents and structure of this tab card correspond to that of the
General tab card of the modules of the SICAM substation controllers and
has space for project-specific comments (see chapter 5.2).
G Parameters
This tab card is used to specify:
G Version
G Device number and
G Transmission parameters of the bay device
G Connection
This tab card lets you specify further details for connection of a bay
device on a MCP assembly or on the PROFIBUS FMS interface of the
SICAM SC.

Proceed as follows:
Select the name of the bay device.
Open the Properties parameter sheet by selecting Edit Object
Properties....

218 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.3 Bay device properties

Parameters tab On the Parameters tab card, select the current version of your bay
card device from the drop-down list of the Version text box.
Depending on the version specified here, the SAS information of the
entire set of indications and commands of the bay device will be
imported into COM IED when you save the parameterization.
This procedure will take some time.
Enter a unique number between 1 and 254 in the Device number text
box. This number is also set on the bay device.
The device number must be unique for a transmission channel of the
MCP communications processor. Project-specific assignment of
these device numbers must be unique. This method provides the
greatest flexibility in the event of any subsequent rerouting.
Enter the specific transmission parameters of your bay
device.
Confirm your inputs with OK.

sas504.gif

Pic. 6-5 Properties, protection unit 7SA511, Parameters tab card

Note:
If you change the version number, the current data will be overwritten
with the set of indications and commands of the new version.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 219


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

Connection tab On the Connection tab card, select the MCP assembly you want
card your bay device to be connected to from the drop-down list of the
Module text box.
Select the internal channel of the MCP communications processor by
which the data of the bay device are to be processed from the drop-
down list of the Channel text box.
Select the external COMx interface of the MCP communications
processor or of the XC2 or XF6 expansion module to which the bay
device is to be connected from the Interface drop-down list.
Confirm your inputs with OK.

SAS 221b.gif

Pic. 6-6 Properties, protection unit 7SA511, Parameters tab card

The transmission protocol is defined during configuration of the MCP


assemblies in the Hardware Configuration application (see chapter 5.6).

Note:
The parameters can be entered only in the order described above, as the
text boxes are enabled according to the entries. COM IED will offer only
parameters that are plausible in accordance with the hardware
configuration of the MCP assemblies.

220 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.3 Bay device properties

Import of the device parameters is logged in the SICAM Report.

sas221a.gif

Pic. 6-7 Importing a bay device, example

Save the parameterization by choosing Station Save.


Exit the parameterization by choosing Station Exit.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 221


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

6.4 SIPROTEC 4 devices with a PROFIBUS FMS interface

The application-specific functional scope and information volume of the


SIPROTEC 4 devices with a PROFIBUS FMS interface are
parameterized using DIGSI 4.
SICAM plusTOOLS detects the parameterized volume of information of
these devices and manages the information in COM IED. For that
purpose, SICAM plusTOOLS and DIGSI 4 must be installed on a system.
Only parameterize the volume of information in DIGSI 4 that will really be
processed in SICAM plusTOOLS.

Paramater If you change the interface volume or information names of the


changes in DIGSI 4 SIPROTEC 4 unit in DIGSI 4 after you have accepted the data into
SICAM plusTOOLS, you will have to import the parameterization again.
If changes are made to the information volume of the device, it is also
advisable to update the data in the COM IED of SICAM plusTOOLS.
Increases in information volume are always made using DIGSI 4 and are
then transferred to SICAM plusTOOLS (object properties of the devices).
If you change the name of information in DIGSI 4, the names will also be
changed accordingly during data import into COM IED. However, the
hierarchical names are retained as these are also used in the variable
designations of SICAM WinCC.

222 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.4 SIPROTEC 4 devices with a PROFIBUS FMS interface

6.4.1 Inserting and parameterizing a SIPROTEC 4 device

To insert a SIPROTEC 4 unit into the COM IED and parameterize it,
proceed as follows:

Inserting Click on the Devices folder in the navigation pane of


network nodes SIMATIC Manager with the right mouse button and select Device
Catalog from the context menu.
In the Device Catalog, open the SIPROTEC devices
folder and select the device.
Drag the device, and thus the network node, and drop it on the data
pane of the SIMATIC Manager.

sas1004.gif

Pic. 6-8 Inserting network nodes

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 223


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

DIGSI Start DIGSI 4 by double-clicking on the SIPROTEC 4 device in the


parameterization Devices folder and specify the information volume.
Open the COM IED and insert the SIPROTEC device from the
Catalog.
Redefine the properties of the SIPROTEC 4 device in COM IED:
Select the symbol of the SIPROTEC 4 Device.
Open the Properties parameter sheet by selecting Edit Object
Properties....
On the Connection tab card, select the Bus and Device parameters
from the drop-down list. A CP must first have been configured and
connected in the stations.
Click on OK.
The SICAM Report appears and displays a progress report on the
current transfer of data from DIGSI 4.
Save the parameterization by choosing Station Save.
Quit COM IED using Station Exit.

Note:
If you change the interface volume or information names of the
SIPROTEC 4 device in DIGSI 4, you must transfer the changes to
COM IED.
Select the name of the device and open its
Properties with Edit Object properties....
The New information, Deleted information and Station-
relevant changes options in the Compatibility keys box of the
Parameter tab card show the changes made in DIGSI 4 that have
been recognized by SICAM plusTOOLS.
Click on OK.
In the SICAM Report, information about the current transfer of data
from DIGSI 4 is displayed.

224 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.4 SIPROTEC 4 devices with a PROFIBUS FMS interface

6.4.2 Inserting an externally parameterized SIPROTEC 4 device

To insert a SIPROTEC 4 device, parameterized in an external


DIGSI 4 system, into a SICAM plusTOOLS project, proceed as follows:
Archive the DIGSI 4 project on the external system with the desired
SIPROTEC 4 device.
Retrieve the DIGSI 4 project onto the PC with the
SICAM plusTOOLS project.
Open the SICAM plusTOOLS project in SIMATIC Manager.
Open the DIGSI 4 project in SIMATIC Manager.
Select the required SIPROTEC 4 device in the Devices folder of the
DIGSI 4 project and copy it by drag-and-dropping it onto the Devices
folder of the SICAM plusTOOLS project.

Note:
The VD numbers of the externally parameterized SIPROTEC 4 device
are reassigned when it is inserted in the SICAM plusTOOLS project.
The new VD numbers are different from the VD numbers already
in the externally parameterized SIPROTEC 4 device.
It is now no longer possible to access the existing SIPROTEC 4 device
from the SICAM plusTOOLS project using DIGSI 4.
To be able to access the SIPROTEC 4 device again, you need to
initialize the device from the SICAM plusTOOLS project using DIGSI 4,
thus transferring the new VD numbers.

Create a network node for PROFIBUS for the SIPROTEC 4 device in


the Devices folder (see Inserting network nodes page 223.).
Open the COM IED and insert the SIPROTEC device from the
Catalog.
Redefine the properties of the SIPROTEC 4 device:
Select the symbol of the SIPROTEC 4 Device.
Open the Properties parameter sheet by selecting Edit Object
Properties....
On the Connection tab card, select the Bus and Device parameters
from the drop-down list.
Click on OK.
The SICAM Report appears and displays a progress report on the
current transfer of data from DIGSI 4.
Save the parameterization by choosing Station Save.
Quit COM IED using Station Exit.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 225


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

6.4.3 Parameterizing a SIPROTEC 4 device externally

External To parameterize a SIPROTEC 4 device in a SICAM plusTOOLS project


parameterization using an external DIGSI 4 system, proceed as follows:
Select the desired SIPROTEC 4 device in the Devices folder of the
SICAM plusTOOLS project.
Export the SIPROTEC 4 device.
Import the SIPROTEC 4 device to the external DIGSI 4 system.
Parameterize the SIPROTEC 4 device using DIGSI 4 on the external
DIGSI 4 system.
Open the device and save the parameterization.

Reinserting a To reinsert an externally parameterized SIPROTEC 4 device in the


device SICAM plusTOOLS project, proceed as follows:
Export the parameterized SIPROTEC 4 device to the external
DIGSI 4 system.
Select the original SIPROTEC 4 device in the Devices folder of the
SICAM plusTOOLS project.
Import the externally parameterized SIPROTEC 4 device to the
original SIPROTEC 4 device in the SICAM plusTOOLS project.
Open COM IED and redefine the properties of the
SIPROTEC 4 device:
Select the symbol of the SIPROTEC 4 Device.
Open the Properties parameter sheet by selecting Edit Object
Properties....
The options New information, Deleted information and Station-
relevant changes in the Compatibility keys box of the Parameter
tab card indicate the changes made in DIGSI 4 that have been
recognized by SICAM plusTOOLS.
Click on OK.
The SICAM Report appears and displays a progress report on the
current transfer of data from DIGSI 4.
Save the parameterization by choosing Station Save.
Quit COM IED using Station Exit.

226 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.4 SIPROTEC 4 devices with a PROFIBUS FMS interface

6.4.4 Transfer the DIGSI 4 project to the SICAM plusTOOLS project

To transfer a DIGSI 4 project with parameterized SIPROTEC 4 devices,


created on an external DIGSI 4 system, to a
SICAM plusTOOLS project, proceed as follows:
Archive the DIGSI 4 project on an external system.
Retrieve the DIGSI 4 project onto the PC with the
SICAM plusTOOLS system.
Open the DIGSI 4 project in SIMATIC Manager.
Configure SICAM SAS using SICAM plusTOOLS.
During configuration, you will need to insert your
SIPROTEC 4 devices in COM IED (see chapter 6.4.1).

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 227


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

6.5 Display sorted SAS information of the bay devices

When saving the parameterization in COM IED, all information of the bay
device are imported into the system and names are created and
automatically linked to an item of SAS information. Freely definable
devices whose information is created and linked manually are an
exception.
The items of SAS information are combined to form groups that bear the
name you gave to the bay device when you inserted it.
You can obtain an overview of the information volume by displaying the
SAS information sorted.
In the navigation pane of the SIMATIC Manager, click on the
COM IED symbol.
Select the required bay device in the data pane and open the device
Object Open from the context menu.
The COM IED Table with the alphabetically sorted items of
SAS information (Hierarchical name column) of the bay device is
displayed.
Sort the information, for example, by name, type, function type, or info
number by clicking on the corresponding column header.

SAS 023.gif

Pic. 6-9 COM IED Table for F1_7SA511

228 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.5 Display sorted SAS information of the bay devices

COM IED Table The COM IED Table is divided into tab cards depending on the type of
tab cards bay device. The following tab cards are displayed for a device with
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol:
G General
G Indications
G Commands
G Measured values
G Metered values
G Status information

For a device with a PROFIBIUS FMS interface, the COM IED Table is
divided into the tab cards:
G Generally used
G Generally not used
G Indications
G Commands
G Measured values
G Metered values
G Status information

For a device with the DNP V3.00 protocol, the COM IED Table is divided
into the tab cards:
G General
G Indications
G Commands
G Measured values
G Metered values
G Status information

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 229


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

Select the relevant tab card and reduce the information volume to the
number of single information items actually required in the project. That
helps improve system performance and relieves the transmission links.
For SIPROTEC 4 devices in DIGSI 4 only parameterize the information
that you actually want to process in SICAM SAS.

Note:
Devices with a PROFIBUS DP interface are not managed in COM IED.

230 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.6 Selecting the information volume of bay devices

6.6 Selecting the information volume of bay devices

You keep number the SAS information items of the bay devices down to
the information volume actually required.
Open the COM IED Table.
Select a tab card.
Select the information you want to delete.
Delete it by choosing Delete from the context menu.
Repeat the delete operation on the other tab cards.
Save your changes by choosing Station Save.

SAS239.gif

Pic. 6-10 Reducing the information volume of F1_7SA511

The other applications are updated.

Note:
Deleted items of information can be manually recreated and relinked at
any time (see chapter 9 and chapter 10).
You can insert new information into the COM IED Table with
Options Expand IED.... The subsequent Expand IED dialog box lets
you enter Name, Type, Function type, Info number, and position.
The new telegrams still have to be linked to SAS information. For how to
do that, see chapter 9 and chapter 10.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 231


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

6.7 Copying Bay Devices

When configuring and parameterizing bay devices, the main effort is


selecting the information actually required from the entire volume of
imported information and deleting the rest.
For that reason, parameterize sample bay devices that you can then
reproduce as often as you like by copying them.
When you copy a bay device, its parameterized information volume is
also transferred. The parameters for connection to the MCP assembly
must be adjusted explicitly.
Select a fully parameterized bay device from the COM IED and copy
the device using Copy in the context menu.
Select COM IED and insert the bay device into COM IED using Paste
in the context menu.
The inserted copy will automatically receive a name extension.
Simultaneously, a new group with the same name is created in the
SIM Browser.
Insert all the copies you need and rename the bay devices by giving them
a unique, station-specific name.
Change the name of the device on opening COM IED. The name of
the group is updated automatically.
Open the Properties parameter sheet and then the Connections tab
card with Object Properties... in the context menu.
Enter the definite connection parameters for connection of the bay
device to an MCP assembly.
Confirm your inputs with OK.
Close parameterization by choosing Station Save.
Quit parameterization of the bay devices by choosing Station Exit.

Note:
Reproduce the SIPROTEC 4 devices under DIGSI 4 and insert the new
devices in COM IED (see chapter 6.4).

232 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.8 Bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface

6.8 Bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface

6.8.1 Inserting a device

Bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface are inserted during hardware


configuration of SICAM SC in SICAM SAS. The interface module IF964
is implemented as an interface that is mounted in a slot of the CPU (see
chapter 5.8). During configuration of the interface module, a PROFIBUS
DP network is created and displayed graphically.
Proceed as follows:
Open the Hardware Configuration application.
Select the device in the Hardware Catalog and drag-and-drop it onto
the PROFIBUS DP.

sas007a.gif

Pic. 6-11 Bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 233


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

Properties Click on the device and select the Properties dialog from the context
menu.

sas605.gif

Pic. 6-12 Properties SIPROTEC4 DP module

Click on the PROFIBUS button to check or change parameterization


of the PROFIBUS connection, for example, the transmission rate and
bus addressing.
Exit configuration with Station Save and Compile.

234 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.8 Bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface

6.8.2 Creating information

The information of the bay device is linked through a SICAM CFC block
and processed through the process image.
For this purpose, you must first create the associated SAS information for
all indications and measured values of the device. For how to do that, see
also chapter 9.2.
Proceed as follows:
Click on Options SIM Browser to select the SIM Browser and
select the bay device SIMEAS Q.
Using the context menu, create all the indications and measured
values that you want to process.

sas26b.gif

Pic. 6-13 Creating SAS information

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 235


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

6.8.3 CFC block, parameterizing SIMEAS Q

Creating a To create a CFC variable, proceed as follows:


CFC variable
Open the SIM application, Indications tab card and enter the
information previously created in the SIM Browser in the Source
using the CFC context menu (see chapter 8.3).
The CFC variable is created in the CFC column.
In the HMI Display column, select Yes from the context menu, so that
the SIMEAS Q indications are logged by the SICAM WinCC Human
Machine Interface.
Switch to the Analog values tab card and repeat the entries (multiple
selection possible).

sas850b.gif

Pic. 6-14 Creating a CFC variable, SIM, Analog values tab card

236 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.8 Bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface

Parameterizing Open the CFC application and parameterize the CFC block for the
CFC blocks SIMEAS Q device.

sas850c.gif

Pic. 6-15 Parameterizing the CFC block SIMEAS Q, chart section

Note:
For more on how to work with CFC see SICAM SAS, Manual
Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS /17/ and
chapter 8.8, chapter 9.7 and chapter 9.8 of this manual.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 237


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

6.9 Substation connection

6.9.1 General

All substations can be connected to a SICAM SC and can communicate


with the SICAM SC with protocol IEC 60870-5-101 (COM IED). These
include not only SICAM productsRTU, micro RTU, and mini RTU but
also SINAUT LSA, stations of other manufacturers and lower-level
SICAM SC.
The substations are connected to the SICAM SC through the RS232
interfaces of the MCP assembly. During hardware configuration of the
SICAM SC, you can define which interfaces are to be used for that
purpose (see chapter 5.6).

TCC TCC

SICAM SC

TCS TCS TCS TCS

TCC TCC

SINAUT LSA SICAM RTU SICAM SC Third-party

Pic. 6-16 Substation connection, schematic

First configure and parameterize your substation and define all


information there that you want to communicate with SICAM SC.

238 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.9 Substation connection

6.9.2 Inserting a substation connection

Proceed as follows for configuration and parameterization of the


substation connection:
Select the COM IED application in the data pane of SIMATIC
Manager and open it with Open object from the context menu.
Open the catalog with menu command Options Catalog.
Open the Substation connections folder and drag the IEC 60870-5-
101 connection onto the COM IED symbol.

sas800.gif

Pic. 6-17 Substation connection TCS IEC 60870-5-101

The substation connection TCS IEC 60870-5-101 with the


subdirectories
G Address structure
G Control direction and
G Monitoring direction
is created.

Select TCS IEC 60870-5-101 and open the dialog box for
parameterizing the substation connection to an interface of the MCP
assembly with Object properties from the context menu.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 239


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

sas809.gif

Pic. 6-18 Properties of substation connection, Connection tab card

Define the interface of the MCP assembly to which you want to


connect the substation on the Connection tab card.

sas811.gif

Pic. 6-19 Properties of substation connection, Basic Parameters tab card

Enter the number of simultaneous commands and setpoints on the


Basic Parameters tab card.

240 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.9 Substation connection

sas812.gif

Pic. 6-20 Properties of substation connection,


IEC 60870-5-101 (COM IED) tab card

Enter the address parameters of the transmission link and click on the
Advanced Parameters button on the IEC 60870-5-101 (COM IED)
tab card.

sas813.gif

Pic. 6-21 Properties of substation connection, advanced parameters

Note:
Changes in the Advanced parameters dialog box require special
knowledge of telecontrol technology and should therefore only be made
by appropriately qualified personnel.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 241


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

6.9.3 Connection in the control direction

Open the control direction of substation connection


TCS IEC 60870-5-101 with Open object from the context menu.
Select Options Extend IED or click on the Extend IED icon.

sas801.gif

Pic. 6-22 Substation connection TCS IEC 60870-5-101, control direction

Deactivate the Create SAS information option and select the


Quantity of information items to be inserted. The selected information
type is not relevant, it will be overwritten when the information of the
substation is overwritten by the information type configured there.
Click on the Create info button.

sas805.gif

Pic. 6-23 Substation connection TCS IEC 60870-5-101, control direction

A row is inserted for each item of information. Copy the information items
of the substation into these rows.
If the substation is a SICAM RTU or a SICAM SC, proceed as follows:
Select in the COM TC, control direction of the SICAM substation
all SICAM information items that you require to process the
commands from SICAM SC (columns Name, Type, and Telegram

242 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.9 Substation connection

address columns). Copy the selection into the COM IED, control
direction of the substation connection TCS in the SICAM SC.
For all other substations, for example, SINAUT LSA or stations or other
manufacturers, proceed as follows:
First copy the information into an EXCEL table and transfer it from
there to the COM IED, control direction TCS in the SICAM SC of the
substation by copying.
Save the parameterization by choosing Station Save.
Exit parameterization in the Control direction with Station Exit.

Note:
No CFC configuration is necessary for command output to substations!

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 243


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

6.9.4 Connection in the monitoring direction

Open the Monitoring direction of the substation connection


TCS IEC 60870-5-101 with Open object from the context menu.
Select Options Extend IED or click on the Extend IED icon.

sas802.gif

Pic. 6-24 Substation connection TCS IEC 60870-5-101, monitoring direction

Deactivate the Create SAS information option and select the


Quantity of information items to be inserted. The selected information
type is not relevant, it will be overwritten when the information of the
substation is overwritten by the information type configured there.
Click on the Create info button.

sas808a.gif

Pic. 6-25 Substation connection TCS IEC 60870-5-101, monitoring direction

244 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6.9 Substation connection

A row is inserted for each item of information. Copy the information items
of the substation into these rows.
If the substation is a SICAM RTU or a SICAM SC, proceed as follows:
Select in the COM TC, monitoring direction of the SICAM
substation all SICAM information items that you want to transfer to
the SICAM SC (columns Name, Type, and Telegram address
columns). Copy the selection into the COM IED, monitoring
direction of the substation connection TCS in the SICAM SC.
For all other substations, for example, SINAUT LSA or stations or other
manufacturers, proceed as follows:
First copy the information into an EXCEL table and transfer it from
there to the COM IED, monitoring direction TCS in the SICAM SC
of the substation by copying.
Save the parameterization by choosing Station Save.
Exit parameterization in the Monitoring direction with
Station Exit.

6.9.5 Address structure

Parameterization of the Address structure is performed with Object


properties in an analogous way to parameterization in the COM TC (see
chapter 7.3).

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 245


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
6 Bay Device / Substation Connection

246 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Control Center Connection 7
Introduction The application SICAM COM TC (Communication to Telecontrol Center)
is used to configure telecontrol links to higher-level control centers. In
COM TC, parameterization of all SAS information relevant to the
exchange of information with the control center is protocol-specific.

Contents 7.1 General 248

7.2 Control center connection 250

7.3 Address structure 262

7.4 Connection in the control direction 263

7.5 Connection in the monitoring direction 267

7.6 Telecontrol lists 271

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 247


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7 Control Center Connection

7.1 General

All SAS information required for communication with higher-level control


centers is configured in the COM TC application.
The telegrams are edited separately for each control center in the control
direction and monitoring direction.

Protocols The telecontrol link to the control centers is implemented using the
following protocols:
G IEC 60870-5-101
G IEC 60870-5-104 (through TCP/IP)
G SINAUT 8-FW
G DNP V3.00 (TC)
G TELEGYR 800
It is possible to combine two different telecontrol protocols for one MCP.

Parameterization in In the control direction, you can specify which SAS information items are
the control to be processed.
direction

Parameterization in In monitoring direction, you can parameterize which SAS information


the monitoring items are to be processed and their assignment to the following
direction telecontrol lists:
G Scan list
G Initiation buffer list
G Basic cycle list
G Telegram buffer list with time stamp:
G Telegram buffer list without time stamp:
G Subordinate basic cycle list
G Counter-controlled list
G Time-controlled list

Note:
To keep the load on the communication line to a minimum, we
recommend only selecting those items of SAS information that will really
be exchanged with the control center when you configure the control
center connection with the COM TC in the SIM Table.

248 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7.1 General

Overview
SIMATIC Manager

Opening COM TC

COM TC
Selecting
a control center

COM TC
Configuration in
the control direction

COM TC
Configuration in the
monitoring direction

COM TC COM TC
Configuring the Telecontrol list
telecontrol lists catalog

COM TC
Saving
and quitting

Pic. 7-1 Parameterization procedure for telecontrol functions

Note:
You will find details of the parameterization rules of each protocol in the
context-sensitive Help texts for COM TC.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 249


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7 Control Center Connection

7.2 Control center connection

You can create the link of the SICAM SC with the control centers either
G while parameterizing the MCP assemblies (see chapter 5.6)
G in COM TC using the Catalog.

To configure using the catalog, proceed as follows:


Open COM TC in SIMATIC Manager with Open Object in the context
menu.
Open the catalog with menu command Options Catalog.
Drag the remote terminal interface, for example, IEC 60870-5-101,
onto the COM TC symbol.

The control center with the subfolders


G Address structure
G Lists
G Control direction
G Monitoring direction
is inserted.

If required, change the automatically assigned name of the control


center.

sas820.gif

Pic. 7-2 Creating a connection to a control center

250 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7.2 Control center connection

Properties To parameterize the Remote terminal interface, proceed as follows:


telecontrol
Select the control center and open the property dialog box with
connection
Object properties from the context menu and define the protocol-
specific parameters on each tab card. You will find detailed
information about these parameters in the on-line help and in the
protocol description.

IEC 60870-5-101

sas821.gif

Pic. 7-3 Properties of remote terminal connection IEC 60870-5-101,


Connection tab card

Define the interface of the MCP assembly through which you want to
connect your SICAM SC to the control center on the Connection tab
card.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 251


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7 Control Center Connection

sas822.gif

Pic. 7-4 Properties of remote terminal connection IEC 60870-5-101,


Basic parameters tab card

Parameterize protocol-specific settings on the Basic Parameters tab


card, click on the Advanced Parameters button, and check the
settings.

sas822a.gif

Pic. 7-5 Remote terminal connection IEC 60870-5-101,


Advanced Parameters, Basic Parameters tab card

Changes in the Advanced parameters dialog box require special


knowledge of telecontrol technology and should therefore only be made
by appropriately qualified personnel.

252 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7.2 Control center connection

sas823.gif

Pic. 7-6 Properties of remote terminal connection IEC 60870-5-101,


Information processing tab card

Enter the parameters for transmission and monitoring for indications,


measured values, and commands on the tab card Information
processing.

sas824.gif

Pic. 7-7 Properties of remote terminal connection IEC 60870-5-101,


Select before Execute tab card

Configure the command output modes and the monitoring time for all
commands that are to be executed in this command output mode on
the Select before Execute tab card.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 253


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7 Control Center Connection

sas825.gif

Pic. 7-8 Properties of remote terminal connection IEC 60870-5-101,


Protection data processing tab card

Configure the transmission mode of the protection data, the number


of faults to be monitored, the background timer with which additional
faults are to be monitored on the Protection data processing tab
card.

254 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7.2 Control center connection

IEC 60870-5-104

sas471.gif

Pic. 7-9 Properties of remote terminal connection IEC 60870-5-104,


Connection tab card

The other tab cards have the same structure as those of the IEC 60870-
5-101 remote terminal connection.

Note:
The IEC 60870-5-104 standard does not contain a relative time. So make
sure that on the Basic Parameters tab card, the option
Full absolute timestamp is always active.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 255


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7 Control Center Connection

SINAUT 8-FW Define the interface of the MCP assembly through which you want to
connect your SICAM SC to the control center on the Connection tab
card. The tab card has the same structure as the Connection tab card
of protocol IEC 60870-5-101.
Switch to the Basic parameters tab card.

sas475.gif

Pic. 7-10 Properties of remote terminal connection SINAUT 8-FW,


Basic Parameters tab card

Parameterize protocol-specific settings on the Basic Parameters tab


card, click on the Advanced Parameters button, and check the
settings.

256 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7.2 Control center connection

sas476.gif

Pic. 7-11 Remote terminal connection SINAUT 8-FW,


Advanced Parameters, Basic Parameters tab card

Changes in the Advanced parameters dialog box require special


knowledge of telecontrol technology and should therefore only be made
by appropriately qualified personnel.

sas477.gif

Pic. 7-12 Properties of remote terminal connection SINAUT 8-FW,


Information processing tab card

Enter the parameters for transmission and monitoring of indications,


measured values, and commands on the Information processing
tab card.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 257


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7 Control Center Connection

sas478.gif

Pic. 7-13 Properties of remote terminal connection SINAUT 8-FW,


command output times tab card

Parameterize the time codes and command output times on the


Command output times tab card, click on the Advanced
Parameters button, and check the settings.

sas479.gif

Pic. 7-14 Properties of remote terminal connection SINAUT 8-FW,


Command output times tab card, advanced parameters

Changes in the Advanced parameters dialog box require special


knowledge of telecontrol technology and should therefore only be made
by appropriately qualified personnel.

258 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7.2 Control center connection

sas479a.gif

Pic. 7-15 Properties of remote terminal connection SINAUT 8-FW,


SINAUT 8-FW (COM TC) tab card

Click on the Advanced Parameters button and check the settings.

sas479b.gif

Pic. 7-16 Properties of remote terminal connection SINAUT 8-FW,


SINAUT 8-FW (COM TC) tab card, advanced parameters

Changes in the Advanced parameters dialog box require special


knowledge of telecontrol technology and should therefore only be made
by appropriately qualified personnel.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 259


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7 Control Center Connection

DNP V3.00

sas480.gif

Pic. 7-17 Properties of remote terminal connection DNP V3.00,


Basic Parameters tab card

sas481.gif

Pic. 7-18 Properties of remote terminal connection DNP V3.00,


Information processing tab card

Enter the parameters for transmission and monitoring of indications,


measured values, and commands on the Information processing
tab card.

260 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7.2 Control center connection

sas482.gif

Pic. 7-19 Properties of remote terminal connection DNP V3.00,


DNP V3.00 (COM TC) tab card

The other tab cards have the same structure as those of the IEC 60870-
5-101 remote terminal connection.

TELEGYR 800

sas465.gif

Pic. 7-20 Properties of remote terminal connection DNP V3.00,


DNP V3.00 (COM TC) tab card

The other tab cards have the same structure as those of the DNP V3.00
remote terminal connection.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 261


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7 Control Center Connection

7.3 Address structure

To parameterize the address structure of the telegrams between the


control center and SICAM SAS, proceed as follows:
Select the COM TC symbol in the data pane of SIMATIC Manager.
Open the control center, for example, TCC IEC60870-5-101.
Select Address structure in the navigation pane of COM TC and
select the Properties dialog with Object Properties in the context
menu.

sas832.gif

Pic. 7-21 IEC60870-5-101 address structure

Click on the Import button.

sas832a.gif

Pic. 7-22 Import of address structure

In the subsequent dialog, select the structure name, for example,


2 octets unstructured.

262 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7.4 Connection in the control direction

7.4 Connection in the control direction

When configuring the connection in the control direction, you can


define which telegrams will be received by the control center.
Configuration is explained using the example of connection through
IEC 60870-5-101.
Proceed as follows:
In the data pane of SIMATIC Manager, open the SIM table with Open
in the context menu.
Switch to the Commands tab card and, in the TCCx column, select
all the information that you require for communication with the control
center by clicking on Yes in the context menu.

sas912.gif

Pic. 7-23 SIM Table, Commands tab card

Save the parameterization by choosing Station Save.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 263


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7 Control Center Connection

Open COM TC.

sas820.gif

Pic. 7-24 COM TC

Open Control direction and enter the information addresses.

sas912a.gif

Pic. 7-25 Control center TCC IEC 60780-5-101, control direction

Enter the transmission parameters for the various types of command


on the appropriate tab cards. You will find detailed information in the
on-line help.

264 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7.4 Connection in the control direction

sas912b.gif

Pic. 7-26 COM TC, control direction, 1-Pole Commands tab card

sas912c.gif

Pic. 7-27 COM TC, control direction, Double-Pole Commands tab cards

sas912d.gif

Pic. 7-28 COM TC, control direction, Analog Setpoint Values - Normalized tab card

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 265


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7 Control Center Connection

sas912e.gif

Pic. 7-29 COM TC, control direction, Analog Setpoint Values tab card

Exit configuration in the Control direction with Station Close.

266 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7.5 Connection in the monitoring direction

7.5 Connection in the monitoring direction

When configuring the connection in the monitoring direction, you define


which information will be transmitted to the control center.
Proceed as follows:
In the data pane of SIMATIC Manager, open the SIM Table with Open
in the context menu.
Switch to the Indications tab card and, in the TCC column, select all
the information items that you require for communication with the
control center by clicking on Yes in the context menu.

sas915.gif

Pic. 7-30 SIM Table, Indications tab card

Save the parameterization by choosing Station Save.


In COM TC, open Monitoring direction and enter the Information
addresses.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 267


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7 Control Center Connection

sas915a.gif

Pic. 7-31 COM TC, monitoring direction, All tab card

Enter the transmission parameters for the various types of information


on the appropriate tab cards. You will find detailed information in the
on-line help.

sas915b.gif

Pic. 7-32 COM TC, monitoring direction, Single-Point Indications tab card

268 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7.5 Connection in the monitoring direction

sas915c.gif

Pic. 7-33 COM TC, monitoring direction, Double-Point Indications tab card

sas915d.gif

Pic. 7-34 COM TC, monitoring direction, Analog Values - Normalized tab card

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 269


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7 Control Center Connection

sas915e.gif

Pic. 7-35 COM TC, monitoring direction, Analog Values - Short Floating Point tab card

sas915f.gif

Pic. 7-36 COM TC, monitoring direction, Protective Indications tab card

Exit by clicking on Station Close.

270 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7.6 Telecontrol lists

7.6 Telecontrol lists

To achieve optimum utilization of the transmission lines while taking


priorities into account, the information in the monitoring direction is
summarized in lists according to different criteria and transmitted with
selectable priorities and cycle times.
The different list types are listed in the Telecontrol List Catalog. Copy the
required lists into the Lists container and then assign each list its priority
and the relevant telegrams.

7.6.1 List types

The Telecontrol List Catalog contains the following list types:


G Scan list (SL)
G Initiation buffer list (IBL)
G Basic cycle list (Bcl)
G Telegram buffer list with time stamp (TBLwT)
G Telegram buffer list without time stamp (TBLwoT)
G Subordinate basic cycle list (Per)
G Counter-controlled list (ccl)
G Time-controlled list (tcl)

Basic cycle list The basic cycle list is used for the continuous transmission of the process
image. The telegrams are permanently transmitted according to
ascending address without a variation check.
There is only one basic cycle list. It is transmitted with minimum priority.
To guarantee that it is transmitted at least once, its priority can be raised
temporarily.

Subordinate basic The periodical list is subordinate to the basic cycle and only one of them
cycle list exists. The telegrams contained in it are transmitted permanently without
any variation check between two basic cycles, with a higher priority than
the basic cycle list. The periodical list mainly contains measured values
that only change slowly. The trigger for transmission is set by counters,
depending on the number of basic cycle telegrams sent.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 271


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7 Control Center Connection

Time-controlled list The time-controlled list is transmitted after a parameterizable cycle time
has expired. The list contains a parameterizable number of telegrams.
The trigger for transmission is set by the system clock.

Counter-controlled The counter-controlled list is transmitted after a user-defined number of


list sent telegrams. The telegrams from the counter-controlled list are
transmitted in ascending order of address. The trigger for transmission is
set by counters.

Scan list Selective interrogation of information concerning telegrams with at least


one common characteristic, for example, general interrogation of all non-
cyclic telegrams.

Initiation buffer list Transmission is performed in telegram image mode without a time
stamp. Spontaneous process changes are written into the transmission
image and the trigger for spontaneous transmission is set. However,
quick, repeated process changes can get lost. For that reason, this list
type is suitable only for persistent indications.

Telegram This procedure is used to enter spontaneous process changes in a


buffer list telegram buffer with a time stamp. When the parameterized number of
with time stamp telegrams is reached, they are spontaneously transmitted according to
the FIFO principle (first-in-first-out).

Telegrambuffer list This procedure is used to enter spontaneous process changes in a


without time stamp telegram buffer in the order they arrive. When the parameterized number
of telegrams is reached, they are spontaneously transmitted according to
the FIFO principle (first-in-first-out).

Note:
Telegrams must only be assigned to one telegram buffer list.

272 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7.6 Telecontrol lists

7.6.2 Inserting lists

To insert transmission lists, proceed as follows:


Open the Lists container in the navigation pane.
Open the Catalog with Options Catalog, drag-and-drop the lists
into the Lists dialog box, Alle tab card, and assign priorities.

sas917a

Pic. 7-37 COM TC, inserting transmission lists

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 273


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
7 Control Center Connection

7.6.3 Assigning information

Switch to the Assignment tab card and assign the information items
to teh lists with Yes from the context menu.

SAS918.gif

Pic. 7-38 COM TC transmission lists, assignment of information

Save the parameterization by choosing Station Save.


Quit the COM TC application with Station Exit.

274 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Information Routing and Distribution 8
Contents 8.1 General 276

8.2 Structuring SAS information 283

8.3 Changing the source or target of SAS information 286

8.4 Renaming SAS information 287

8.5 Deleting SAS information 289

8.6 Selecting SAS information for COM TC 291

8.7 Selecting SAS information for SICAM WinCC 292

8.8 Configuring CFC functions 293

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 275


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8 Information Routing and Distribution

8.1 General

The SICAM SAS substation automation system consists of several


system components, all of which access the information configured and
parameterized using SICAM plus TOOLS.
SICAM WinCC is implemented as the Human Machine Interface
SICAM WinCC.
Automation tasks, such as generation of derived information or
command processing, are implemented using the CFC application.
In the SICAM Information Manager SIM application of the
SICAM plusTOOLS configuration system, the information is distributed
to the relevant system components.
The SAS information items linked in that way can be imported under
SICAM WinCC for further processing or assigned to the relevant CFC
blocks during CFC configuration.
For details, please refer to the following manuals:
G SICAM SAS, Manual Human Machine Interface SICAM WinCC /19/
G SICAM SAS, Manual SICAM plusTOOLS CFC Blocks /18/

The SICAM Information Manager SIM application is divided into the


following function-specific modules:
G SIM Browser
G SIM Table
G MIM Table

276 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8.1 General

8.1.1 SIM Browser

The SIM Browser application is used for:


G Designing a station topology
G Changing the hierarchical name of SAS information
G Inserting or deleting information.
After changes in the SIM Browser, the other applications of
SICAM plusTOOLS are updated.

Calling up The SIM Browser is started with Options SICAM Information


SIM Browser Browser from the following applications:
G SIMATIC Manager
G SICAM Information Manager SIM
G COM TC
G COM IED

By selecting a folder in the navigation pane of the SIM Browser,


you can display all lower-level information in the data pane.
To display the configured information volume, click on the name of a
bay device or an input/output module.

sas026a.gif

Pic.8-1 SIM Browser, data structure, example

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 277


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8 Information Routing and Distribution

8.1.2 SIMTable

The SIM Table contains all items of SAS information that have been
created automatically or manually. This table lets you make assignments
to various system components and processing functions.

Functions In the SIM Table


G You can specify where an item of information will be created (e.g.
MIM, COM TC, COM IED, CFC)
G You can select where indications, analog values and metered values
will be distributed to (HMI, COM TC, CFC)
G You can define the source and destination of an SAS information item
G You can disconnect the source and destination of an SAS information
item
G You can assign process feedback to commands
G You can enable command release
G You can call up the MIM Table for assigning SAS information
G You can call up COM IED for assigning SAS information

SIM Table The SIM Table is divided into the following tab cards according to
tab cards information type: All, Indications, Commands, Measured values,
Metered values, and Status information.
On the All tab card, the SAS information items are sorted alphabetically
in the
Hierarchical name column.

sas027a.gif

Pic. 8-2 SIM Table, All tab card

278 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8.1 General

sas027b.gif

Pic. 8-3 SIM Table, Indications tab card

sas027c.gif

Pic. 8-4 SIM Table, Commands tab card

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 279


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8 Information Routing and Distribution

sas027d.gif

Pic. 8-5 SIM Table, Measured values tab card

sas027e.gif

Pic. 8-6 SIM Table, Metered values tab card

280 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8.1 General

sas027f.gif

Pic. 8-7 SIM Table, Status Information tab card

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 281


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8 Information Routing and Distribution

8.1.3 MIM Table

The MIM Table is the interface of the SIM to the hardware configuration
of the SICAM SC. When saving the hardware configuration
SAS information for the individual indications and commands of the
input/output modules is automatically created and entered in the
MIM Table.

Functions G Creating SAS information for output modules that are operated in
process image mode (Standard output tab card)
G Disconnecting links to SAS information
G Re-assigning SAS information to hardware addresses of the input/
output modules
G Filtering according to data types (tab cards)
G Table functions (sorting, cutting, pasting)

sas860.gif

Pic. 8-8 MIM Table, Standard output tab card

282 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8.2 Structuring SAS information

8.2 Structuring SAS information

During configuration of the SICAM SC, of the bay device connections,


and of the communication to control centers, SAS information is created.
The SAS information is stored in SIM, MIM, COM IED, and COM TC
under its hierarchical name, which is automatically assigned by SICAM
plusTOOLS.
Using the SIM Browser, you design a project-specific, freely-definable
station topology and assign the individual items of SAS information to
the defined hierarchical levels.
As hierarchical levels, you can choose, for example, voltage levels and
bays, ensuring that your project has a clear and easy-to-understand tree
structure.

Creating groups To define your own individual station topology, first create groups with
unique names on the desired hierarchical levels.
Open the SIM Browser with
Options SICAM Informations-Browser.
Select a hierarchical level.
Create a new group by choosing Insert Group.
Enter the name of the group.
Repeat the procedure for all hierarchical levels.

SAS 225.gif

Pic.8-9 SIM Browser, creating groups

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 283


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8 Information Routing and Distribution

Structuring Once you have created the individual groups, assign the
SAS information to the relevant hierarchical level.
Select the SAS Information and drag-and-drop it onto the name of the
desired group.
or
Select the SAS information (multiple selection is possible) and click
on Cut in the context menu.
Select the target group and insert the SAS information and click on
Paste in the context menu.

Proceed in the same way to assign the following items to the hierarchical
levels:
G All items of information of an input/output module
G Individual items of information of the input/output modules
G All items of information of a bay device
G Individual items of information of a bay device
G All items of information of a bay device
G Status indications of the SICAM SC modules, bay devices, and the
communication links
G Manually created information

Save the new structure of your SAS information by choosing


Station Save.

284 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8.2 Structuring SAS information

Assigning all In the navigation pane, select the required group, for example, of a
information hardware component, and drag-and-drop it onto the group to which
you want to assign the information.

Assigning In the navigation pane, click on the required group, for example, a
individual items of hardware component.
information
Select the individual items of information in the data pane and drag-
and-drop the information onto the group to which you want to assign
the information.

SAS026.gif

Pic.8-10 Hierarchical structure of the SAS information, example

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 285


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8 Information Routing and Distribution

8.3 Changing the source or target of SAS information

The source and the destination of an SAS information item are assigned
by SICAM plusTOOLS during configuration, depending on the origin of
the information. This default source or destination can be modified when
changes in processing the information become necessary.
Select the Source or Target column In the SIM Table and enter the
new specifications with the context menu.

sas901.gif

Pic. 8-11 Changing the source

286 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8.4 Renaming SAS information

8.4 Renaming SAS information

The hierarchical name of each SAS information item is assigned


automatically during data parameterization. The name can be changed
using the SIM Browser.
The Hierarchical name column of the other applications of
SICAM plusTOOLS is updated.

Renaming To rename an SAS information item:


SAS information
Open the SIM Browser and select the name you want to change.
Select Rename from the context menu.
The edit mode is enabled for the chosen name.
Change the name and confirm by pressing the ENTER key.

sas247.gif

Pic.8-12 Renaming SAS information

Renaming Select the name to be changed in the SIM Browser and select
a group Rename from the context menu.
The edit mode is enabled for the chosen name.
Change the name and confirm by pressing the ENTER key.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 287


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8 Information Routing and Distribution

Changing The hierarchical name defines the storage location of the


hierarchical SAS information in the SIM Table.
names
To change a hierarchical name:
Select the desired SAS information in the Hierarchical name column
of the SIM Table and click on Rename in the context menu. The
SIM Browser opens.
Change the name of the SAS information item in the SIM Browser as
described above.

sas241.gif

Pic. 8-13 Changing hierarchical names

288 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8.5 Deleting SAS information

8.5 Deleting SAS information

Depending on the application, SAS information can be deleted in the


SIM browser or COM IED applications.

Deleting in the In the SIM Browser, you can delete any SAS information, regardless of
SIM Browser its origin.
Select all SAS information not required in the data pane of the
SIM Browser.
Multiple selection is possible.
Delete the information by choosing Delete from the context menu.
Repeat the delete procedure as often as necessary.
Save by selecting Station Save.

sas237.gif

Pic.8-14 Deleting SAS information in the SIM Browser

The SIM, MIM, COM TC, and COM IED applications are updated.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 289


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8 Information Routing and Distribution

Deleting in the The SIM Table contains all information of your SICAM SAS Station,
SIM Table regardless of its origin, for example, SICAM SC, bay devices,
substations, or information items manually created for CFC links.
To delete unused SAS information items, proceed as follows:
Open the SIM Table.
Select all SAS information items you want to delete.
Multiple selection is possible.
Delete with Delete from the context menu and save with
Station Save.
The SIM Browser, COM IED, and COM TC are updated.

Deleting in the The COM IED application lets you specify the information volume of the
COM IED bay devices of your station, whose entire information volume is imported
on inserting using the Bay Device Catalog.
To delete unused SAS information items, proceed as follows:
Open the COM IED application.
Select all SAS information items you want to delete.
Multiple selection is possible.
Delete with Delete from the context menu and save with
Station Save.
The SIM Table, SIM Browser, and COM TC are updated.

Deleting in COM TC The COM TC application contains all information items that marked Yes
in the TCCx column of the SIM Table.
To delete unused SAS information items, proceed as follows:
Open the COM TC application.
Select all SAS information items you want to delete from COM TC.
Multiple selection is possible.
Delete with Delete from the context menu and save with Station
Save.
The information items are deleted from COM TC and marked No in the
SIM Table in the TCCx column.
or
Open the SIM Table.
Select all SAS information items that you want to delete from the
COM TC in the TCCx column. Multiple selection is possible.
Select with No from the context menu and save with Station
Save.
The information items are only deleted from COM TC.

290 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8.6 Selecting SAS information for COM TC

8.6 Selecting SAS information for COM TC

For each control center that you have configured, a TCCx column is
created in the SIM Table. In these columns, you can specify which SAS
information will be used for communication with the respective control
center.
Select Yes from the context menu for information in column TCCx or
change the entry with a double-click. Multiple selection is possible.

sas237a.gif

Pic. 8-15 SIM Table, selecting information for COM TC, example

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 291


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8 Information Routing and Distribution

8.7 Selecting SAS information for SICAM WinCC

Distribution of the SAS information to the SICAM WinCC Human


Machine Interface is implemented using the SIM Table.
In the HMI Display column, you can define whether an SAS information
will be displayed in a display.
In the HMI1 List and HMI2 List columns, you can define whether SAS
information will be processed by the SICAM message management,
for example, for logging in message lists.
The HMI1 List and HMI2 List columns are only evaluated on the
Indications tab card.
In the HMI1 List and HMI2 List columns, you can specify whether a
switching operation will be implemented from an operator station.
The SAS information can be distributed to a maximum of two Human
Machine Interfaces.
Select a field in the HMI1 List or HMI2 List column and enter Yes
from the context menu (multiple selection is possible) or you can
change the entry by double-clicking on the cell in question.

sas229c.gif

Pic. 8-16 SIM Table Indications tab card, example

The tagged SAS information can be imported by the SICAM WinCC


Human Machine Interface after data compilation in SIM.
You will find further details in the description SICAM SAS, Manual
Human Machine Interface SICAM WinCC /19/.

292 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8.8 Configuring CFC functions

8.8 Configuring CFC functions

The CFC application is used within the SICAM SAS substation


automation system, for example, for the following purposes:
G Creating derived information, e.g. group indications
G Processing command outputs
G Configuring command interlocks
G Defining simple switching sequences.
G Integrating bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface.

The link to the relevant items of SAS information is made using the
SIM Table. There you can create the appropriate CFC variables for all
items of SAS information you want CFC to process.
For information that is generated by CFC, you must enter CFC in the
Source column of the SIM Table (e.g. for derived information).

The exact procedure for creating CFC variables is described in chapter


9.7 for the monitoring direction and in chapter 8.8 for the control direction
(for columns, also refer to picture 8-2 and picture 8-4).

This chapter explains the basic procedure for


CFC configuration in SICAM SAS.
You will find further details in SICAM SAS, Manual
SICAM plusTOOLS CFC Blocks /18/.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 293


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8 Information Routing and Distribution

8.8.1 Parameterizing CFC blocks

Creating a First create a chart folder:


chart folder
Select the M7 Program container in the navigation pane of the
SIMATIC Manager.
Select Insert M7 software Chart container.

sas043.gif

Pic. 8-17 Creating chart container

sas043a.gif

Pic.8-18 Inserting a chart folder

That creates a folder named Charts.


Rename the container CFC Charts.

294 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8.8 Configuring CFC functions

Calling CFC Open the container CFC Charts and insert a CFC chart with Insert
New Object CFC from the context menu.

sas044b.gif

Pic. 8-19 Inserting a CFC chart

The CFC chart named CFC1 is displayed in the data pane.


Select the CFC1 container and open it with Open Object in the
context menu.

SAS044a.gif

Pic. 8-20 Calling CFC

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 295


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8 Information Routing and Distribution

8.8.2 Importing SICAM CFC blocks

Preparing CFC Before you configure the CFC charts, the SICAM CFC blocks must be
imported, the required priority classes configured, and the standard
priority class defined for the project/station. These steps have to be
performed once when generating a new station.
Import the SICAM CFC blocks into the block catalog by choosing
Options Block Types.
Enable Project in the Source group. An overview of the blocks that
can be imported is displayed in the left selection box.

CFC013.gif

Pic.8-21 Block types... dialog box

296 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8.8 Configuring CFC functions

Select the all blocks. This is the recommended procedure. However,


you can also make a partial selection, that is, just select the blocks
you require.
After selecting the blocks to be imported, click on the arrow in the
direction of the chart folder. The blocks are compiled during the import
process.
After the installation is complete, click on the Close button in the
Importing Blocks dialog box.

CFC014.gif

Pic.8-22 Import blocks dialog box

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 297


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8 Information Routing and Distribution

Click on the Close button in the Block Types... dialog box.


After all blocks have been imported, you will see the catalog of block
families displayed in the right selection box of the CFC user interface.

CFC016.gif

Pic. 8-23 Catalog of CFC blocks after installation has been successfully completed

298 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8.8 Configuring CFC functions

8.8.3 Configuring tasks

During graphic configuration with SICAM CFC blocks, the blocks are
assigned to certain priority classes.

Instructions as to which blocks you will need to configure for which


priority classes can be found in the description of the blocks in Section
Priority classes and in Chapter 2.1 of the manual SICAM SAS, Manual
SICAM plusTOOLS CFC Blocks /18/ or in the same place in the on-line
documentation if you click on
Start SICAM plusTOOLS CFC blocks manual.
These instructions must be observed.

Configuring Define the priority classes in CFC by choosing Options OB/


priority classes Priority Class.... A background priority class (OB1) is given by
default.
Rename OB1 to Backgrnd.
Enter the value 4096 in the Stack field and and confirm with
Accept.

cfc012.gif

Pic.8-24 Configuring priority classes

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 299


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8 Information Routing and Distribution

Switch to the Software Interrupt tab card. Up to eight priority classes


can be specified for software interrupts.
Enter the name SW_Interr1 for the first priority class.
Enable the priority class by clicking on the Active check box.
Enter the value 4096 in the Stack field.
Confirm your input with OK.

cfc012b.gif

Pic.8-25 Configuring priority classes for software interrupts

300 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8.8 Configuring CFC functions

8.8.4 Defining the standard priority class

As CFC blocks are imported they are assigned to a priority class straight
away. You can automate this procedure by defining a priority class as
default priority class. In our example, we have chosen the SW_Interr1
priority class.
Open the Execution Order dialog box by choosing
Edit Execution Order....
Select the SW_Interr1 priority class.
Select Edit Predecessor for installation position.

cfc019.gif

Pic. 8-26 Defining the order of execution

A dialog box provides information on the selected priority class.


Confirm the message with OK.
Close the Execution order dialog box.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 301


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8 Information Routing and Distribution

8.8.5 Parameterizing a CFC block

Select a group from the block catalog, for example,


SICAM_INDICATIONS, and select a CFC block from that group.
Drag-and-drop the block into a window of the chart container.

CFC045.gif

Pic. 8-27 Inserting a CFC block

Double-click somewhere in the pane with the block. The sheet with
the block is displayed magnified.

You will find further details of how to parameterize an indication block to


configure a group indication in chapter 9.7 and command blocks in
chapter 10.8.
Quit the CFC configuration by choosing Chart Exit.

Note:
All changes to a CFC function become effective immediately.
It is not necessary to save them explicitly!

302 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8.8 Configuring CFC functions

Note:
For further information about configuring the automation functions using
CFC, please refer to:
G SIMATIC S7, Manual CFC V5.0/V5.1 /5/
G SICAM SAS, Manual SICAM plusTOOLS CFC Blocks /18/

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 303


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
8 Information Routing and Distribution

304 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Information Processing
in the Monitoring Direction 9
Contents 9.1 General 306

9.2 Creating SAS information in the SIM Browser 307

9.3 Creating SAS information in the MIM Table 309

9.4 Disconnecting links 312

9.5 Selecting SAS information for COM TC 313

9.6 Selecting SAS information for SICAM WinCC 314

9.7 Configuring CFC functions 315

9.8 Parameterizing CFC indication blocks 317

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 305


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9 Information Processing in the Monitoring Direction

9.1 General

Distribution of the SAS information in the monitoring direction to other


system components can be configured using the
SICAM Information Manager SIM application of the SICAM plusTOOLS
configuration system.
In the SIM Table, you can specify which SAS information items will be
processed by the SICAM WinCC Human Machine Interface.
You can also define the necessary CFC variables for all items of
SAS information that are to be processed in the CFC application. A
typical application for a CFC link is generation of derived information,
such as group indications.

The SAS information items linked in that way can be imported under
SICAM WinCC for further processing or assigned to the relevant CFC
blocks during CFC configuration.

For details, please refer to the following manuals:


G SICAM SAS, Manual Human Machine Interface SICAM WinCC /19/
and
G SICAM SAS, Manual SICAM plusTOOLS CFC Blocks /18/

The SICAM Information Manager SIM application including the areas:


G SIM Table
G MIM Table
G SIM Browser
is described in chapter 8.1.

306 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9.2 Creating SAS information in the SIM Browser

9.2 Creating SAS information in the SIM Browser

In the SIM Browser, you can create the SAS information for:
G Result variables of derived information, for example, group
indications, which you generate using CFC blocks.
G Bay devices that are inserted using the Hardware Configuration
application and whose information is further processed using CFC.
G Deleted information of bay devices or SICAM SC modules that you
want to reinsert.
The SAS information is created in the SIM Browser on the chosen
hierarchical level.

9.2.1 Creating SAS Information

Open the SIM Browser.


Select the hierarchical level at which you want to create information
and choose the type of information that you want to insert in the
context menu, for example, Insert indication Single (SP).
Overwrite the name of the indication with a unique name. This name
is entered in the Hierarchical Name column of the SAS information.
Save your changes by selecting Station Save.

sas250.gif

Bild 9-1 SIM Browser, inserting a single-point indication

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 307


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9 Information Processing in the Monitoring Direction

9.2.2 Linking SAS information

Using the linking mode of the SIM Browser, the inserted SAS information
is linked into the following applications:
G MIM Table
G COM IED

Example COM IED Select the desired Hierarchical Name box in COM IED, and select
Link to... from the context menu.
The SIM Browser opens.
The Windows shortcut icon is attached to the mouse pointer to
indicate the SIM Browser's linking mode.
Double-click on the information you want to link in the SIM Browser.
The information is entered in COM IED in the selected
Hierarchical Name box.
or
Select the information in the SIM Browser and insert it into the
Hierarchical Name box in the COM IED using Create Link in the
context menu.

308 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9.3 Creating SAS information in the MIM Table

9.3 Creating SAS information in the MIM Table

For all modules that are operated in process image mode, you must first
create the connections of the SAS information in the MIM Table.

9.3.1 Creating connections

Select MIM in SIMATIC Manager and open the MIM Table with
Open Object in the context menu.
Switch to the Standard output tab card.
Select the last (empty) row and keep the cursor on the row number.
Select the type of information you want to insert using the
context menu, e. g. Insert Indication Single (SP).
A new table row is inserted on the Standard output tab card.
The red color of the characters indicates that the information is not yet
fully parameterized.

Note:
The red color of the text on the Standard output tab card can also mean:
G Double assignment of pins
G Invalid block type
G Module not inserted.

Status indications For the standard SIMATIC modules, you can also
create the status indications of the modules.
To insert a single-point indication for status indications of a standard
module, choose
Insert Indication Single (SP) in the context menu, and
Insert Indication Fleeting (SP_F) to insert two fleeting
indications.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 309


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9 Information Processing in the Monitoring Direction

9.3.2 Defining connections

Select the Rack cell in the MIM Table and select the number of the
rack in which the module is inserted from the context menu.
Multiple selection of SAS information is possible.
Select the Slot cell and choose the slot number from the context
menu.
Multiple selection of SAS information is possible.
Select the Connection cell and choose the desired connection from
the context menu.

The system runs a plausibility check on the address of the selected


connection.
If the address is plausible, the color of the text changes to black.

sas860.gif

Bild 9-2 MIM Table, Standard output tab card

The newly created connections still have to be linked to SAS information


in order to enable the system to process them.

310 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9.3 Creating SAS information in the MIM Table

9.3.3 Creating and linking SAS information

Select the Hierarchical name cell in the MIM Table and create the
corresponding SAS information for the defined connections by
choosing Create SAS Information from the context menu.
The hierarchical name is written into the MIM Table. The other
applications are updated.

sas861.gif

Bild 9-3 MIM Table, Standard output tab card

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 311


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9 Information Processing in the Monitoring Direction

9.4 Disconnecting links

You can disconnect the links of SAS information by:


G choosing Disconnect from the context menu in the
Hierarchical Name column in the COM IED or in the MIM Table.
G deleting or changing the Source on the Indications and Measured
and Metered Values tab cards in the SIM Table.
G deleting the link using Delete in the context menu.

9.4.1 Application example

If, for example, you replace a bay device whose information is already
configured in COM TC or in CFC, you can retain these configurations in
SICAM plus TOOLS.
Proceed as follows:
First disconnect the links of the SAS information of the bay device in
COM IED by choosing Disconnect from the context menu.
Delete the old bay device in COM IED.
Insert the new bay device into COM IED.
Delete all items of SAS information of the new bay device in
COM IED.
Move the SAS information of the old bay device to the group of the
new bay device in the SIM Browser.
Delete the group of the old bay device in the SIM Browser.
Finally, relink the SAS information by choosing Link to... from the
context menu or by drag-and-drop.

Note:
You can disconnect and reestablish links of the SAS information of
SICAM SC modules in the same way as for a bay device (see
chapter 9.4.1).

312 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9.5 Selecting SAS information for COM TC

9.5 Selecting SAS information for COM TC

For each control center that you have configured, a TCCx column is
created in the SIM Table. In these columns, you can specify which SAS
information will be used for communication with the respective control
center.
Select Yes from the context menu for information in column TCCx or
change the entry with a double-click. Multiple selection is possible.

sas229e.gif

Bild 9-4 SIM Table, selecting information for COM TC, example

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 313


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9 Information Processing in the Monitoring Direction

9.6 Selecting SAS information for SICAM WinCC

Distribution of the SAS information to the SICAM WinCC Human


Machine Interface is realized using the SIM Table.
In the HMI Display column, you can define whether an SAS information
will be displayed in a display.
In the HMI1 List and HMI2 List columns, you can define whether SAS
information will be processed by the SICAM message management,
for example, for logging in message lists.
The HMI1 List and HMI2 List columns are only evaluated on the
Indications tab card.
The SAS information can be distributed to a maximum of two Human
Machine Interfaces.

Select a field in the HMI1 List or HMI2 List column and enter Yes
from the context menu (multiple selection is possible) or you can
change the entry by double-clicking on the cell in question.

sas229d.gif

Bild 9-5 SIM Table Indications tab card, example

The tagged SAS information can be imported by the SICAM WinCC


Human Machine Interface after data compilation in SIM.
You will find further details on this subject in the SICAM SAS, Manual
Human Machine Interface SICAM WinCC /19/.

314 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9.7 Configuring CFC functions

9.7 Configuring CFC functions

The CFC application is implemented in the SICAM SAS substation


automation system in order, among other things, to create derived
information items, for example, group indications.
The basic procedure for CFC configuration is described in chapter 8.8.

First you must create the corresponding CFC variable for all items of
SAS information you want CFC to process in the SIM Table.
For information generated by CFC, you need to enter CFC in the Source
column of the SIM Table (e.g. for derived information).

9.7.1 Creating a CFC variable for module outputs

Select the SIM symbol in the data pane of the SIMATIC Manager.
Open the SIM table by choosing Object Open in the context
menu.
Select the SAS information you want to be the result variable of your
CFC link.
In the Source column, enter CFC from the context menu.
The associated CFC variable is created in the CFC column.
Repeat the entry for all the result variables required in CFC.
Save your inputs in the SIM Table by choosing Station Save.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 315


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9 Information Processing in the Monitoring Direction

9.7.2 Creating a CFC variable for module inputs

Select the SIM symbol in the data pane of the SIMATIC Manager.
Open the SIM table by choosing Object Open in the context
menu.
Select the SAS information you want to be the input variable of your
CFC link.
Click on the text box of the CFC column and create a CFC variable by
choosing Create from the context menu.
Repeat the above steps for all items of SAS information you need for
your automation function in CFC.
Save your inputs in the SIM Table by choosing Station Save.

sas227a.gif

Bild 9-6 Creating CFC Variables SIM Table, Status Information tab card

316 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9.8 Parameterizing CFC indication blocks

9.8 Parameterizing CFC indication blocks

First create the organizational structure for the CFC configuration. The
procedure for inserting CFC charts and importing CFC blocks is
described in detail in chapter 8.8.
Then you can start parameterization of the selected chart.
The following example shows you how to create a group indication from
several items of status information.

Selecting Open the container of the SICAM_INDICATION block family in the


and inserting block catalog.
a block
Select the AND_I block and drag-and-drop it onto the configuration
window of the CFC chart. The newly inserted block is highlighted.

CFC045.gif

Bild 9-7 Inserting a CFC block

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 317


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9 Information Processing in the Monitoring Direction

Specifying Select Number of I/Os... from the context menu.


I/Os
Enter the value 5 for five indications (I/Os) in the Number field.

cfc020.gif

Bild 9-8 Specifying the number of I/Os

Close the Number of I/Os dialog box with OK.

Switching Position the cursor right next to the block.


between display
Double-click with the left mouse button. The block will be displayed
modes
magnified.

CFC045b.gif

Bild 9-9 Sheet view display mode

318 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9.8 Parameterizing CFC indication blocks

Interconnecting Select the DW IN1 input.


a block

sas_046.gif

Bild 9-10 Establishing the connection to the CFC variable

Select Connection to Operand... from the context menu. The Insert


interconnection to operand dialog box opens.

CFC046b.gif

Bild 9-11 Linking the CFC variable

Click on the SIM Browser button.


Double-click on variable Status\DI\0\11 in the SIM Browser.
Click on OK in the context menu in the Insert Interconnection
to Operand... .

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 319


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9 Information Processing in the Monitoring Direction

Assign input DW IN2 the CFC variable


Status\DI\0\12.biBgr_nicht_gest from the SIM Tabelle.
Assign input DW IN3 the CFC variable
Status\CO\0\13.biModule_unplugged from the SIM Table.
Assign input DW IN4 the CFC variable
Status\CO\0\14.biModule_unplugged from the SIM Table.
Assign input DW IN5 the CFC variable
Status\CR\0\15.biModule_unplugged from the SIM Table.
Asssign the output of the link the CFC variable
20kV.biGroup_Ind1 from the SIM Table.

CFC046c.gif

Bild 9-12 Interconnected CFC block AND_I

Quit the CFC processing using the menu bar


Chart Exit.

Note:
All changes to a CFC function become effective immediately.
It is not necessary to save them explicitly!

320 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9.8 Parameterizing CFC indication blocks

Note:
For further information about configuring the automation functions using
CFC, please refer to:
G SIMATIC S7, Manual CFC V5.0/V5.1 /5/
G SICAM SAS, Manual SICAM plusTOOLS CFC Blocks /18/

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 321


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
9 Information Processing in the Monitoring Direction

322 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Information Processing
in the Control Direction 10
Contents 10.1 General 324

10.2 Creating SAS Information in the SIM Browser 325

10.3 Creating SAS information in the MIM Table 327

10.4 Disconnecting links 331

10.5 Selecting SAS information for COM TC 332

10.6 Selecting SAS information for SICAM WinCC 333

10.7 Command assignment 334

10.8 Configuring CFC functions 336

10.9 Parameterizing CFC command blocks 337

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 323


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10 Information Processing in the Control Direction

10.1 General

You can configure the distribution of the SAS information in the control
direction to other system components using the
SICAM Information Manager SIM application of the
SICAM plus TOOLS configuration system.
In the SIM table you can specify which commands will be triggered by
the SICAM WinCC Human Machine Interface.
In addition, you can define the necessary CFC variables for all
commands to be triggered by the CFC application.

The SAS information items linked in that way can be imported under
SICAM WinCC for further processing or assigned to the relevant CFC
blocks during CFC configuration.
For details, please refer to the following manuals:
G SICAM SAS, Manual Human Machine Interface SICAM WinCC /19/
and
G SICAM SAS, Manual SICAM plusTOOLS CFC Blocks /18/

The SICAM Information Manager application with its modules


G SIM Table
G MIM Table
G SIM Browser
is described in chapter 8.1.

324 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10.2 Creating SAS Information in the SIM Browser

10.2 Creating SAS Information in the SIM Browser

In the SIM Browser, you can create the SAS information, for example, for:
G Result variables of derived commands that you generate with the help
of CFC blocks.
G Bay devices that are inserted using the Hardware Configuration
application and whose information is further processed using CFC.
G Deleted information of bay devices or SICAM SC modules that you
want to reinsert.
The SAS information is created in the SIM Browser on the chosen
hierarchical level.

10.2.1 Creating SAS Information

Open the SIM Browser.


Select the hierarchical level at which you want to create information
and chosse the type of information that you want to insert in the
context menu, for example, Insert command Single
Persistent (SC_PER).
Overwrite the name of the indication with a unique name. This name
is entered in the Hierarchical Name column of the SAS information.
Save your changes by selecting Station Save.

sas251.gif

Pic. 10-1 SIM Browser, inserting a single command

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 325


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10 Information Processing in the Control Direction

10.2.2 Linking SAS information

Using the linking mode of the SIM Browser, the inserted SAS information
is linked into the following applications:
G MIM Table
G COM IED

Example COM IED Select the desired Hierarchical Name box in COM IED, and select
Link to... from the context menu.
The SIM Browser opens.
The Windows shortcut icon is attached to the mouse pointer to
indicate the SIM Browser's linking mode.
Double-click on the information you want to link in the SIM Browser.
The information is entered in COM IED in the selected
Hierarchical Name box.
or
Select the information in the SIM Browser and insert it into the
Hierarchical Name box in the COM IED using Create Link in the
context menu.

326 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10.3 Creating SAS information in the MIM Table

10.3 Creating SAS information in the MIM Table

For all modules that are operated in process image mode, you must first
create the connections of the SAS information in the MIM Table.

10.3.1 Creating connections

Select MIM in SIMATIC Manager and open the MIM Table with
Open Object in the context menu.
Switch to the Standard output tab card.
Select the last (empty) row and keep the cursor on the row number.
Select the type of information you want to insert using the
context menu, for example, Insert Setpoint Value
Digital (SE_D) 8.

sas860a.gif

Pic. 10-2 MIM Table, creating connections

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 327


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10 Information Processing in the Control Direction

A new table row is inserted on the Standard output tab card.


The red color of the characters indicates that the information is not yet
fully parameterized.

Note:
The red color of the text on the Standard output tab card can also mean:
G Double assignment of pins
G Invalid block type
G Module not inserted.

Note:
For the SIMATIC standard modules, you can also create the status
indications of the modules (see chapter 9.3.1).

328 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10.3 Creating SAS information in the MIM Table

10.3.2 Defining connections

Select the Rack cell in the MIM Table and select the number of the
rack in which the module is inserted from the context menu.
Multiple selection of SAS information is possible.
Select the Slot cell and choose the slot number from the context
menu.
Multiple selection of SAS information is possible.
Select the Connection cell and choose the desired connection from
the context menu.

The system runs a plausibility check on the address of the selected


connection.
If the address is plausible, the color of the text changes to black.

sas860.gif

Pic. 10-3 MIM Table

The newly created connections still have to be linked to SAS information


for the system to be able to process them.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 329


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10 Information Processing in the Control Direction

10.3.3 Creating and linking SAS information

Select the Hierarchical name cell in the MIM Table and create the
corresponding SAS information for the defined connections by
choosing Create SAS Information from the context menu.
The hierarchical name is written into the MIM Table. The other
applications are updated.

sas861.gif

Pic. 10-4 MIM Table, Standard output tab card

330 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10.4 Disconnecting links

10.4 Disconnecting links

You can disconnect the links of SAS information by:


G choosing Disconnect from the context menu in the
Hierarchical Name column in the COM IED or in the MIM Table.
G deleting or changing the Source on the Indications and Measured
and Metered Values tab cards in the SIM Table.
G deleting the link using Delete in the context menu.

Application If, for example, you replace a bay device whose information have already
example been configured in COM TC and/or in CFC, you can retain these
configurations in SICAM plus TOOLS.
Proceed as follows:
First disconnect the links of the SAS information of the bay device in
COM IED by choosing Disconnect from the context menu.
Delete the old bay device in COM IED.
Insert the new bay device into COM IED.
Delete all items of SAS information of the new bay device in
COM IED.
Move the SAS information of the old bay device to the groups of the
new bay device in the SIM Browser.
Delete the groups of the old bay device in the SIM Browser.
Finally, relink the SAS information by choosing Link to... from the
context menu or by drag-and-drop.

Note:
You can disconnect and reestablish links of the SAS information of
SICAM SC modules in the same way as for a bay device.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 331


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10 Information Processing in the Control Direction

10.5 Selecting SAS information for COM TC

For each control center that you have configured, a TCCx column is
created in the SIM Table. In these columns, you can specify which SAS
information will be used for communication with the respective control
center.
Select Yes from the context menu for information in column TCCx or
change the entry with a double-click. Multiple selection is possible.

sas249a.gif

Pic. 10-5 SIM Table, select information for COM TC

332 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10.6 Selecting SAS information for SICAM WinCC

10.6 Selecting SAS information for SICAM WinCC

Distribution of the SAS information to the SICAM WinCC Human


Machine Interface is effected using the SIM Table.
In the HMI1 List and HMI2 List columns, you can specify whether a
command can be triggered from the Human Machine Interface.
The command can be triggered by a maximum of two Human Machine
Interfaces.

Select a field in the HMI1 List or HMI2 List column and enter Yes
from the context menu (multiple selection is possible) or you can
change the entry by double-clicking on the cell in question.

sas249.gif

Pic. 10-6 SIM Table, select information for HMI

The tagged SAS information can be imported by the SICAM WinCC


Human Machine Interface after data compilation in SIM.
You will find further details in the description SICAM SAS, Manual
Human Machine Interface SICAM WinCC /19/.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 333


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10 Information Processing in the Control Direction

10.7 Command assignment

10.7.1 Assigning process feedback to a command

Select the Commands tab card in the SIM Table.


For the command to which you want to assign a process feedback,
select the Feedback cell.
Select Connect to... from the context menu.
The SIM Browser opens.
The Windows shortcut icon is attached to the mouse pointer to
indicate the SIM Browser's linking mode.
In the SIM Browser, double-click on the indication you want to assign
as process feedback.
The hierarchical name of the chosen indication is written into the
Feedback cell.

sas1011a.gif

Pic. 10-7 Assigning process feedback to a command

334 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10.7 Command assignment

10.7.2 Assigning a command to process feedback

Select the Indications tab card in the SIM Table.


Select the Feedback cell for the indication you want to use as process
feedback.
Select Connect to... from the context menu.
The SIM Browser opens.
The Windows shortcut icon is attached to the mouse pointer to
indicate the SIM Browser's linking mode.
Double-click on the command to which you want to assign the
indication as process feedback in the SIM Browser.
The hierarchical name of the command is written into the
Is process feedback of cell.

sas037a.gif

Pic. 10-8 Assigning a command to process feedback

10.7.3 Activating the Command Release Function

In the With CR column, you define whether a command is output on a CO


command output module that is connected to a CR command release
module.
This connection changes a 1-pole command output
to a 1 1/2-pole, safe command output.
Select the Commands tab card of the SIM Table.
Click on the Command Release column and enter Yes from the
context menu.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 335


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10 Information Processing in the Control Direction

10.8 Configuring CFC functions

The CFC application is used in the SICAM SAS substation automation


system, for example, for the following purposes:
G Processing command outputs.
G Configuring command interlocks.
G Defining simple switching sequences.

The link to the relevant items of SAS information is made using the
SIM Table. There you can create the appropriate CFC variables for all
items of SAS information you want CFC to process.

10.8.1 Creating CFC variables

Open Object Open in the context menu to open the SIM Table.
Create a CFC variable for all items of SAS information destined for
command outputs by choosing Create from the context menu of the
CFC-IN column.
At the same time the system writes the associated CFC variable into
the CFC-OUT cell.
Save by selecting Station Save.

sas1010a.gif

Pic. 10-9 Creating CFC variables for command processing

336 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10.9 Parameterizing CFC command blocks

10.9 Parameterizing CFC command blocks

First create the organizational structure for the CFC configuration. The
procedure for inserting CFC charts and importing CFC blocks is
described in detail in chapter 8.8.
Then you can start parameterization of the selected chart.

The following example shows you how to parameterize process


feedback and command release for a command output.

10.9.1 Command Block with Command Release

This is an example of how to parameterize process feedback and


command release for a command output.

Inserting a block Open the container of the SICAM_COMMAND block family in the
into the chart block catalog.
Select the PC block and drag-and-drop it into the configuration
window of the CFC chart. The newly inserted block is highlighted.
Select Object Properties... from the context menu. The Block
Object Properties dialog box opens.
Switch to the I/Os tab card.
Display the RELCTRL input by deactivating the check box in the Not
displayed column.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 337


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10 Information Processing in the Control Direction

cfc022.gif

Bild 10-10 Making I/Os visible

Close the Block Object Properties dialog box with OK.

338 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10.9 Parameterizing CFC command blocks

Parameterizing Switch to sheet view display mode.


blocks
Select the RELCTRL input.
Select Object Properties... from the context menu. The Properties -
Connection dialog box opens.
.

cfc024.gif

Bild 10-11 Parameterizing inputs

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 339


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10 Information Processing in the Control Direction

Enter a 1 in the Value box. This activates the command release


function through a CR module.

cfc024b.gif

Bild 10-12 Parameterizing the RELCTRL input

Quit the Properties - I/O dialog box with OK.


Parameterize input PROC_FB with 1. This specifies command output
with process feedback.
Parameterize input COMMTERM with1. This specifies command
termination on receiving feedback.
Parameterize input OUTPUT_T with 600 ms. This specifies the
output time of the command.
Parameterize input CH_MON_T with 1 s. This specifies the feedback
monitoring time. The system then waits for process feedback for this
period.

340 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10.9 Parameterizing CFC command blocks

Interconnecting Select Connection to Operand... from the context menu. The Insert
a block interconnection to operand dialog box opens.

CFC046b.gif

Bild 10-13 Linking the CFC variable

Click on the SIM Browser button.


Double-click on variable 6kV\F3\CO\0\13\O01_0 in the SIM Browser.
Click on OK in the context menu in the Insert Interconnection
to Operand... .

cfc024c.gif

Bild 10-14 Interconnected PC CFC block with command release

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 341


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10 Information Processing in the Control Direction

10.9.2 Parameterizing the command block (without command release)

The following example shows you how to parameterize process


feedback for a command output.

Inserting a block Open the container of the SICAM_COMMAND block family in the
into the chart block catalog.
Select the PC block and drag-and-drop it into the configuration
window of the CFC chart. The newly inserted block is highlighted.
Select Object Properties... from the context menu. The Block
Object Properties dialog box opens.
Switch to the I/Os tab card (see picture 10-10).
Display the RELCTRL input by clicking on the check box in the Not
displayed column (see picture 10-10).
Close the Block Object Properties dialog box with OK.

Parameterizing Switch to Sheet view display mode. The default setting of the
blocks RELCTRL input is 0. That means that no command release is
parameterized through a CR module.
Select the PROC_FB input.
Select Object Properties... from the context menu. The Properties -
Connection dialog box opens (see picture 10-15).

342 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10.9 Parameterizing CFC command blocks

Enter a 1 in the Value box. This specifies command output with


process feedback.
.

cfc025.gif

Bild 10-15 Parameterizing the PROC_FB input

Quit the Properties - I/O dialog box with OK.


Parameterize input COMMTERM with1. This specifies command
termination on receiving feedback.
Parameterize the OUTPUT_T input with 600 ms. This specifies the
output time of the command.
Parameterize the CH_MON_T input with 1 s. This specifies the
feedback monitoring time. The system then waits for process
feedback for this period.

Interconnecting Select input di_IN in the CFC Chart.


a block
Select Interconnection to Operand from the context menu, click on
the SIM Browser button, and then double-click on information item
6kV\F3\CO\0\13\Q00_0 in the SIM Browser

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 343


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
10 Information Processing in the Control Direction

cfc025b.gif

Bild 10-16 Interconnected PC CFC block without command release

Quit the CFC processing by choosing Chart Exit.

Note:
Parameter changes in CFC blocks become effective immediately. It is
not necessary to save them explicitly!

Note:
For further information about configuring the automation functions using
CFC, please refer to:
G SIMATIC S7, Manual CFC V5.0/V5.1 /5/
G SICAM SAS, Manual SICAM plusTOOLS CFC Blocks /18/

344 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Downloading the Project Data
to the Target System 11
Contents 11.1 Compiling data 346

11.2 SICAM Report 351

11.3 Downloading to the target system 354

11.4 Operating system 361

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 345


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11 Downloading the Project Data to the Target System

11.1 Compiling data

Before the project data are downloaded to the target system, they must
be compiled into system data blocks that can be read internally.
Data compilation must be effected in the order stated below because
each compilation procedure is based on the previous one:
1. Compile and save in Hardware Configuration.
2. Compile for the target system in SICAM Information Manager.
3. Create system data blocks for PROFIBUS FMS interface.
4. Compile in CFC.

11.1.1 Compiling the Hardware Configuration

During compilation of the hardware configuration, the user-specific data


blocks of the hardware configuration of SICAM SC and the
parameterized information of the bay devices with PROFIBUS DP
interface are added to the system data blocks to be transmitted.
You should carry out this compilation as soon as you have completed the
configuration and parameterization of the SICAM SC in the
Hardware Configuration application of SIMATIC Manager:
Click on Station Save and Compile.
Compilation is logged in the SICAM Report.

346 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11.1 Compiling data

11.1.2 Compiling in SIM

During the compilation for the target system, the data for
G Bay devices connection
G Control center connection
G Information distribution and
G For the HMI, CFC, and input/output module interfaces
are preprocessed.
Start compilation as follows:
Click on SIM in the data pane of SIMATIC Manager and select
Compile from the context menu.
or
Open the SIM Table.
Select Options Compile for Target System. That opens the
Compile for Target System window.

SAS 109.gif

Pic. 11-1 Compile for Target System dialog box

Click on Start.
Compilation is logged in the SICAM Report.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 347


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11 Downloading the Project Data to the Target System

Message numbers

Note:
Prior to compilation, check that the message number range 1 to 20,000
is sufficient. If necessary, extend the range as follows:
Select the CPU, M7 Program in the navigation pane of
SIMATIC Manager and then select Special Object Properties,
Message numbers from the context menu and enter the new number
range.
It will no longer be possible to change the number range once
compilation has been carried out in SIM!
However, if you do subsequently need more indications, for example,
because you are using additional bay devices, please contact our hotline.
You will then be told how to extend the number range.

348 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11.1 Compiling data

11.1.3 Creating system data blocks for PROFIBUS FMS

To create system data blocks (SDBs) for the PROFIBUS FMS interface
CP 443-5 Basic, proceed after compilation in SIM as follows:
Select the project in SIMATIC Manager and double-click on
PROFIBUS Network in the data pane.
The NetPro application opens.
Confirm the Open Network window with Yes. The data are
transferred and the network is opened.
In the graphical representation of the network, select CPU.

sas960.gif

Pic. 11-2 NetPro, creating system data blocks for PROFIBUS FMS

Click on Network Save and Compile.... The Save and Compile


window appears.
Select the Compile and check all option and then click on OK. The
compilation and check is started.
Exit NetPro by clicking on Network Exit.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 349


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11 Downloading the Project Data to the Target System

11.1.4 Compiling in CFC

Compile the charts configured in CFC.


Open CFC.

SAS044a.gif

Pic. 11-3 Open container CFC1

Select Chart Compile. The Compile dialog box opens.


Accept the default settings and confirm with OK.

CFC088.gif

Pic. 11-4 Compiling dialog box in CFC

Note:
For further information on how to generate the CFC system data blocks,
please refer to the following manuals:
G SICAM SAS, Manual SICAM plusTOOLS CFC Blocks /18/
G SIMATIC S7, Manual CFC V5.0/V5.1 /5/.

350 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11.2 SICAM Report

11.2 SICAM Report

The SICAM Report logs compilation in detail with:


G Status symbol
G Designation of the log text
G Date
G Time
It is divided into several tab cards that provide fast access to the
individual partial compilations, making it easier for the user to locate
errors. The tab cards are automatically generated during compilation.
When closing the SICAM Report, you should save the log texts if you
want to be able to view them again later. Otherwise they will be deleted.

SICAM Report The SICAM Report is subdivided into the following tab cards:
tab card
G Overview
G SICAM Update Manager
G SICAM Runtime Components
G HMI
G CFC
G Information distribution
G I/O modules
G Connection
G CP
G Bay device import
G Plausibility check

SICAM Report The status of each line of the report is indicated visually by different
status symbols symbols:
Standard information (white-blue), e.g. Begin, Without errors, End

Warning (yellow-black), e.g. an inconsistency has been detected.

Caution (red-white), e.g. fatal error.

The rotating symbol (black-white) indicates that the system is


currently processing a function.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 351


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11 Downloading the Project Data to the Target System

Opening SICAM Report is automatically started when a compilation is carried out


SICAM Report in SIM.
You can also call up SICAM Report manually in SIM:
Select Options SICAM Report.

sas303.gif

Pic. 11-5 SICAM Report, Overview tab card

Closing To close the SICAM Report, proceed as follows:


SICAM Report
Click on the Close button.

Saving Click on the Export button.


SICAM Report
Select the folder path at which you want the log texts to be stored.
The log texts will be saved as textfile.txt, and loaded and appended to
during the next compilation run.

Deleting You can delete the log texts of a tab card in the SICAM Report
SICAM Report irrespective of the contents of the other tab cards.
Open the relevant tab card in the SICAM Report.
Click on the Remove button.

Deleting Click on the Clear All button.


the entire
SICAM Report

Printing the SICAM Click on the Print button.


Report
The log texts are output on the default printer.

352 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11.2 SICAM Report

SICAM Update Manager allows you to watch the compilation process as


it happens.

SAS 301.gif

Pic. 11-6 SICAM Report, SICAM Update Manager tab card

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 353


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11 Downloading the Project Data to the Target System

11.3 Downloading to the target system

After all configured data have been compiled without any errors, the
system data blocks are ready to download to the target system.
Please stick to the following order when downloading to the target
system:
1. Download the hardware configuration data.
2. Download the M7 program.
3. Download the firmware of the MCP assemblies.
4. Download the configuration of the MCP assemblies.
5. Download the configuration of the
PROFIBUS interface CP 443-5 Basic.

Caution:
Switch your station OFFLINE using the mode selector switch of the CPU
before downloading data! For downloading, the mode selector switch
must be in the STOP position.

Connect the programming device or PC to the


MPI (multipoint interface) of the M7 CPU.

354 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11.3 Downloading to the target system

11.3.1 Downloading the hardware configuration

Open the Hardware Configuration application and click on Target


System Download to Module.
Select the CPU module in the dialog box and confirm with OK.
The hardware configuration of the CPU module is downloaded.

SAS 246.gif

Pic. 11-7 Select Target Module dialog box

Note:
The loaded configuration is effective immediately in main memory!

Save the entire hardware configuration in ROMDIR with Target


System Copy RAM to ROM.

sas1100.gif

Pic. 11-8 Copying RAM to ROM

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 355


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11 Downloading the Project Data to the Target System

Note:
Download the configuration data of the MCP assemblies or the CP as
system data blocks directly from SIMATIC Manager interface. This
ensures that all MCP assembly parameters or CP assembly parameters
are downloaded together with the relevant connection data.

11.3.2 Downloading the M7 Program

Select the M7 Program container in SIMATIC Manager.

sas094.gif

Pic. 11-9 M7 Program container

Click on Target system Manage M7 Target System.


Select Drive on M7 via MPI from the drop-down list as the
transmission medium and M0: as the Partner drive.

356 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11.3 Downloading to the target system

sas091.gif

Pic. 11-10 Manage M7 target system, Programs tab card

Select all objects in the Programming Device list and click on the
Install button.
The system data blocks are downloaded.
Restart the CPU to activate the changes!

11.3.3 Downloading MCP firmware

The protocol software provided for transmission to bay devices and


control centers is downloaded individually for each MCP assembly.

Requirements G Your PG/PC is linked to the substation controller.


G The CPU is already loaded with the required hardware configuration
parameters (system data blocks) and in the STOP state.
G On the MCP communications processor, the STOP LED is lit, the
LOAD LED is flashing, that is, the MCP is waiting for the firmware to
be loaded.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 357


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11 Downloading the Project Data to the Target System

Download the firmware as follows:


In the SIMATIC Manager data pane, select an MCP assembly under
Station.
Open the Properties parameter sheet of the MCP assembly by
choosing Object Properties from the context menu.
To download the data, click on the Download Firmware button.

SAS 093.gif

Pic. 11-11 Properties - MCP assembly, General tab card

The data of the MCP assembly are downloaded.


The LOAD LED flashes during data transmission.

Repeat this download procedure for all MCP assemblies.

Note:
To replace firmware that is already loaded, proceed as follows:
Press Reset three times.
The STOP LED lights up, the LOAD LED flashes.

358 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11.3 Downloading to the target system

11.3.4 Downloading MCP configuration data

Download the parameterized data of the MCP assemblies on the


SIMATIC Manager's user interface.
The mode selector switch of the CPU must be in the STOP position. The
MCP communications processor is therefore also in the STOP state.

Download the configuration of the MCP assembly as follows:


Open the structure of an MCP assembly in the navigation pane of
SIMATIC Manager.
Select the System Data container.

sas095.gif

Pic. 11-12 System Data container of an MCP assembly

Click on Target System Download.


The system data blocks are downloaded.
Repeat the download procedure for each MCP assembly.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 359


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11 Downloading the Project Data to the Target System

11.3.5 Downloading CP configuration data

Download the parameterized data of the PROFIBUS FMS interface


CP 443-5 Basic on SIMATIC Manager's user interface.

Download the configuration of the PROFIBUS FMS interface


CP 443-5 Basic as follows:
Open the structure of the CP 443-5 Basic in the navigation pane of
SIMATIC Manager.
Select the System Data container.

SAS1021.gif

Pic. 11-13 System Data container of the CP 443-5 Basic

Click on Target System Download.


Confirm the ensuing queries with Yes or OK.
The CP 443-5 Basic module goes into STOP, the system data blocks
are transmitted, and the module is restarted.

360 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11.4 Operating system

11.4 Operating system

For details of how to install the operating system M7 RMOS32 and how
to load the Memory Card, please refer to SICAM SAS Technical
Description /12/.

Note:
After installing the operating system, it is necessary to reload the
programs and data.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 361


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
11 Downloading the Project Data to the Target System

362 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Archiving / Project Documentation 12
Introduction The data volume of individual projects can be very large. That is why you
should store projects that are not required externally. Use the archive and
retrieve functions of SIMATIC Manager to do that.
The documentation on the configuration and parameterization of your
station can be carried out using the optional component Docpro or
SIMATIC Manager.

Contents 12.1 Archiving project data 364

12.2 Retrieving project data 367

12.3 Project documentation 368

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 363


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
12 Archiving / Project Documentation

12.1 Archiving project data

When adjusting the basic settings of SIMATIC Manager (see


chapter 2.3.1), the settings for archiving are also defined. To back up
your projects, proceed as follows:

Note:
To archive your projects, you need to quit all SICAM plus TOOLS
applications with the exception of SIMATIC Manager.

Select File Archive on the menu bar of SIMATIC Manager and the
Archive dialog box will appear.
Select the project to be archived from the project list and confirm with
OK.
WinZip starts. The Add dialog box opens.
Select the archive drive and archive folder in the Add to Archive box
and enter a name for the archive file. Activate the
Include Subfolders and Save Path Specifications options in the
Folder box.
Confirm your settings by clicking on the Add button. WinZip creates
the archive file.
Exit WinZip by selecting File Exit WinZip from the menu bar.

Note:
The only compression program permitted with SICAM plus TOOLS is
the compression program WinZip! WinZip is included in the scope of
delivery.

364 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
12.1 Archiving project data

User projects

sas244.gif

Pic. 12-1 Archiving user projects

Libraries

sas244a.gif

Pic. 12-2 Archiving a library

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 365


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
12 Archiving / Project Documentation

Demo projects

sas244b.gif

Pic. 12-3 Archiving a demo project

366 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
12.2 Retrieving project data

12.2 Retrieving project data

To reload archived project data into your project folder, proceed as


follows:
Select from the menu bar of SIMATIC Manager
File Retrieve. The Retrieve-Select Archive dialog box appears.
Confirm the default WinZip Archives file type and then select the
archive file.
Click on the Open button. WinZip starts and displays the contents of
the archive.
Select Actions Extract from the menu bar. The Extract dialog box
appears.
Specify the path to the target folder and activate the option Use Path.
Click on Extract. WinZip unpacks the archive to the specified folder.
Exit WinZip by choosing File Exit WinZip.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 367


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
12 Archiving / Project Documentation

12.3 Project documentation

To document configuration and parameterization of your SICAM SAS


system, you have the following options:
G Documentation with the object Global Title Block in SIMATIC
Manager
G Documentation with the optional component DOCPRO.
Both tools support the individual definition of layout and contents but
Docpro offers a wider range of options.
That way, you can selectively specify individual print objects that are
summarized in a job list. The layout settings enable the station
documentation to be adjusted to your own company documentation
templates, for example, assignment plans, etc.
You will find exact details of how to proceed in the manual included in
delivery of DOCPRO.
The following gives a brief description of the basic options.

Note:
DOCPRO is not included in the scope of supply of SICAM plus TOOLS.

368 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
12.3 Project documentation

12.3.1 Print objects

In the SICAM SAS system, you can select individual print objects on
various hierarchy levels of your project. This can be a complete container
(e.g. MIM), an individual bay device (e.g. F1_7SA511) or PROFIBUS
parameterization.
Proceed as follows:
For the job list to which you want to add a new print object, select
Print Object from the context menu.

sas951.gif

Pic. 12-4 Defining print objects

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 369


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
12 Archiving / Project Documentation

In the subsequent dialog, select the object, for example, PROFIBUS


and confirm with OK.

sas952.gif

Pic. 12-5 Selecting print objects

The selected object is added to the job list.

sas953.gif

Pic. 12-6 Job list

370 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
12.3 Project documentation

12.3.2 Layout

DOCPRO offers a wide range of options for specifying the appearance of


your station documentation. The layout templates provided already cover
the most common documentation guidelines. They can also be adjusted
and edited individually.

sas954.gif

Pic. 12-7 Layout settings

Layout templates

sas956.gif

Pic. 12-8 Layout templates, example

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 371


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
12 Archiving / Project Documentation

Editing the layout

sas950.gif

Pic. 12-9 Editing the layout

372 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Appendix A
The table contains the data types with the designations that appear on
system user interfaces, their use in the CFC, and the internal variable
designation.
You will find further details on this subject in the SICAM SAS, Manual
SICAM plusTOOLS CFC Blocks /18/.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 373


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
A Appendix

A.1 Data types of the SICAM SAS process data structure

Tabelle A-1 The data types in the SICAM SAS PD structure and their use

Designation (in hardware SIM table CFC blocks CFC In CFC Out Comment
config) prefix prefix

Single-point indication SP CRI - bi


SPI bi -
AND_I bi (INn) bi n = 1,..,120
OR_I bi (INn) bi n = 1,..,120
INVER bi bi
DELAY_I bi bi
INDIC bi -

Double-point indication DP TSP bi bi


CRI - bi
SPI bi -
TSP bi bi
AND_I bi (INn) bi n = 1,..,120
OR_I bi (INn) bi n = 1,..,120
INVER bi bi
DELAY_I bi bi

Fleeting indication SP_F CRI - bi


SPI bi -
DELAY_I bi bi
PULS bi bi
GRP_SPF bi bi

Bit pattern indication (8 BO_8 CMPB pi (OP1 -


bits) CMPBC and
OP2)

Bit pattern indication (16 BO_16 CMPB pi (OP1 -


bits) CMPBC and
OP2)

Bit pattern indication (24 BO_24 CMPB pi (OP1 -


bits) CMPBC and
OP2)

Bit pattern indication (32 BO_32 CMPB pi (OP1 -


bits) CMPBC and
OP2)

374 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
A.1 Data types of the SICAM SAS process data structure

Tabelle A-1 The data types in the SICAM SAS PD structure and their use

Designation (in hardware SIM table CFC blocks CFC In CFC Out Comment
config) prefix prefix

Transformer tap indication ST CMPT ti (OP1 -


CMPTC and
OP2)

Metered value capturing IT LIMU mv -


Metered value LIML mv -
ADD mv (INn) mv n = 1, .., 120
SUB mv mv
MUL mv (INn) mv n = 1, .., 120
DIV mv mv
CMP mv (INn) -
NRP mv mv
ACQ mv mv
MULC mv mv

Measured value ME_NC LIMU mv -


(with event buffer entry) ME_NA LIML mv -
ADD mv (INn) - n = 1, .., 120
SUB mv mv
MUL mv (INn) mv n = 1, .., 120
DIV mv mv
CMP mv - n = 1, .., 120
NRP mv mv
LZM mv mv
NLC mv mv
MULC mv mv

Digital output setpoint SE_D8 SPC vi vo


SE_D16
SE_D32

Analog output setpoint SE_NA SPCA ri ro


SE_NC

Digital output persistent SC_PER CC xi xo


command DC_PER

Command output pulse SC_PUL PC di do 1-, 2-, and


command DC_PUL TAP 1 1/2-pole
COMM_MCP

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 375


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
A Appendix

Tabelle A-1 The data types in the SICAM SAS PD structure and their use

Designation (in hardware SIM table CFC blocks CFC In CFC Out Comment
config) prefix prefix

Switching authority SA AUTHORIT ai ao is created


command in SIM

Restore (freeze) command CI REQ - zo is created in


REC zi zo SIM
ACQ zi -

Labeling command SMC LABEL ui uo is created in


SIM

376 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
References

/1/ SIMATIC S7, STEP 7 Basic Knowledge


Consisting of: Setting Up and Programming the S7-300 Easily,
STEP 7 User Manual, Programming Manual for the S7-300/400,
and Manual for User changing from S5 to S7
6ES7810-4CA04-8BA0
/2/ SIMATIC S7/M7, Manual S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Logic
Controller Assembly, Module Data
6ES7498-8AA03-8BA0
/3/ SIMATIC M7, Technical Overview: The S7-400 Programmable
Controller - Configuration and Application
6ES7498-8AA00-8BB0
/4/ Manual M7-SYS
Draft versions of user programs for the SIMATIC M7-300/-400 for
use under RMOS32, consisting of programmer, user and refer-
ence manual
6ES7 802-0FA14-8BA0
/5/ SIMATIC S7, Manual CFC V5.0/V5.1
6ES7813-0CC03-8BA0
/6/ SIMATIC WinCC Documentation V5.0
6AV6392-1XA05-0AB0
/7/ SIMATIC WinCC Configuration Manuals V5.0
6AV6392-1CA05-0AB0
/8/ SICAM, Manual Analog Input Function Module AI32/16
E50417-G8976-C004-A2
/9/ SICAM, Manual Digital Input Function Module DI32
E50417-G8976-C005-A2
/10/ SICAM, Manual Command Output Function Module CO32
E50417-G8976-C006-A2
/11/ SICAM, Manual Command Release Function Module CR
E50417-G8976-C007-A2
/12/ SICAM SAS Technical Description
E50417-T8976-C010-A4
/13/ SICAM SAS Mounting Instructions
E50417-B8976-C011-A4
/14/ SICAM SAS Maintenance and Diagnostics
E50417-W8976-C012-A4

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 377


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
References

/15/ SICAM SAS/RTU Planning and Design


E50417-P8976-C015-A3
/16/ SICAM SAS Overview
E50417-F8976-C016-A4
/17/ SICAM SAS, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS
for SAS
E50417-H8976-C017-A4
/18/ SICAM SAS, Manual SICAM plusTOOLS CFC Blocks
E50417-H8976-C018-A4
/19/ SICAM SAS, Manual Human Machine Interface SICAM WinCC
E50417-H8976-C019-A4
/20/ SICAM SAS, Manual Measured/Metered Value Processing Utility
SICAM Valpro
E50417-H8976-C020-A3
/21/ SIMATIC NET, Manual NCM S7 for PROFIBUS for STEP7 V5
6GK7080-5AA04-8BA0
/22/ SICAM SAS, Manual Fault Record Processing Utility SICAM
Recpro
E50417-H8976-C021-A2
/23/ SICAM SAS, SICAM SAS as Redundant System
E50417-H8976-C142-A1

378 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

Ab Interrogation list: Telecontrol list that processes the information


necessary for communication with higher-level control centers in the
monitoring direction ( COM TC).

Address We make a distinction between two different types of addresses:


G For identifying a certain module (slot, rack)
G For identifying a certain operand or operand area (e.g. input I 12.1).

Adjusting An adjusting command is a function of the output time of the command


command depending on the duration of the command output in the operating
control center. They are suitable for making manual setpoint settings in
slow control circuits.

AI The analog input module is available with 16 relay inputs or with 32 solid-
state inputs.

APA Job buffer for the outputs

Application Application

Application The SICAM plusTOOLS configuration system is divided into the following
function-specific applications: SIM, COM IED, COM TC and Hardware
Configuration.

Application The SICAM SAS differentiates between the operating system of the CPU
program and the application system. The latter is connected with the programming
software STEP 7, for example, with CFC from blocks, and is stored in
the code blocks. Data are stored in the data blocks.

ASP Trigger (or initiation) buffer list: Telecontrol list that processes the
information necessary for communication with higher-level control
centers in the monitoring direction ( COM TC).

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 379


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

Automatic Automatic reclosing is a function that is frequently used in power


reclosing distribution for extinguishing electric arcs on overhead lines. Automatic
reclosing means that a closed circuit-breaker is opened and reclosed
after a short delay.

Automation system An automation system is a programmable logic controller or an


automation computer from the SIMATIC S7/M7 family.

Automation Controlled using a computer program and not permanently stored in a


computer retentive memory ( Programmable logic controller).

Back-up battery The back-up battery ensures that pre-defined data areas, flags, timers,
and counters are held retentively. SICAM RTU and SICAM SC function
without a back-up battery.

Bay device Bay devices include:


G Bay controllers
G Mini bay units
G Protection devices
G Measuring instruments
IED

Bay device Protocol that is used for communication between the substation
protocol controller and bay devices, for example, IEC 60870-5-103.

Bit pattern A bit pattern indication is a processing function on the digital input module
indication that makes it possible jointly to acquire and process digital process-
related information that is present at several inputs in parallel. For bit
pattern size, you can choose between 1, 2, 3, and 4 bytes.

BO_x Bit pattern indication (bitstring of x bits);


x designates the size in bits (8, 16, 24, or 32 bits).

Bus A bus is a transmission medium that interconnects several stations. Data


transmission can be serial or parallel, along electric cables or along fiber
optic cables.

Central controller The central controller is the equipped rack that contains the SIMATIC M7
CPU of the SICAM SC or the SIMATIC S7 CPU of the SICAM RTU.

Central rack Rack

380 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

CFC Continuous Function Chart. CFC is a graphic editor that allows you to
configure a program using prefabricated blocks.

CFC blocks Blocks are parts of an application program that are self-contained in
function, structure, or purpose. With SICAM plusTOOLS you have
obtained a library of blocks specially developed for substation
automation.

Chatter blocking A bouncing input (for example, as a result of a relay contact fault) is
disconnected after a parameterizable monitoring time and cannot
produce any further signal changes. This function prevents the system
from being overloaded in the event of a fault.

CI Restore (freeze) command for metered values (counter interrogation


command)
The restore command is automatically generated as soon as metered
value capturing has been parameterized for a DI module or a bay device.
The restore command refers to the entire module or bay device.

CO Command output module

Code block In a SIMATIC S7/M7 a code block is a block that contains part of the
application program (as opposed to a data block, which contains only
data).

COM IED Communication to Intelligent Electronic Device. This application is used


for configuring communication with bay devices.

COM TC Communication with Telecontrol Center. This application is used for


configuring to higher-level control centers.

Commandending With the command ending function, a running command output is


terminated when the parameterized output time elapsed or when the
process feedback assigned to it arrives.

Commands Commands are safe process outputs with a defined output time. Before
the output voltage is switched through, a number of checks is performed
(for example, one-out-of-n monitoring, readback of the relay drivers,
impedance and electrical isolation of the load, and so on).

Communication PROFIBUS address parameter that is allocated to each SICAM SAS. It


reference (KR) is needed to process the fault records of the connected protection
devices by SICAM RecPro (value range between 3 and 127).

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 381


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

Communications The MCP communications processor manages communication of a


processor SICAM SC (Substation Controller) with higher-level telecontrol centers
and/or bay devices. The number of interfaces that are available can be
increased by using the XC2 and XF6 expansion modules.

COMTRADE Common Format for Transient Data Exchange for Power Systems

Configuration Configuration means arranging, addressing, and parameterizing the


modules of the SICAM Substation Controller and the SICAM RTU in a
rack using the Hardware Configuration application.

Container The SICAM plusTOOLS data are stored in function-specific containers.


Some examples are the SIM Table, the MIM Table, COM IED and COM
TC. IED and COM TC.

CPU module Central processing unit of the SICAM SC and the SICAM RTU with a
control and arithmetic unit, memory, operating system, and interface for
programming devices.

CR Command release module

Cycle time The cycle time is the time the CPU needs to execute the application
program once.

Cyclic interrupt Cyclic interrupts are tasks which are started at regular intervals, that is,
cyclically.

Data block Data blocks are data areas within the application program that contain
user data. There are global data blocks that can be accessed by all code
blocks.

DB Data block

DC_PER Double command, persistent command

DC_PUL Double command, pulse command

DCF77 In the Federal Republic of Germany, the high-precision official time is


kept by the Physikalisch-Technische-Bundesanstalt PTB (German
Federal Testing Laboratories) in Braunschweig. The atomic clock station
of the PTB broadcasts this time by means of the long-wave time signal
transmitter at Mainflingen near Frankfurt am Main. The transmitted time
signal can be received within a radius of about 1500 km around Frankfurt
am Main.

382 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

DI Digital input module

Diagnosis alarm Modules with diagnostic capability report system faults that they have
recognized to the CPU by means of diagnosis alarms.

Diagnostic buffer The diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU into which
the diagnosis events are written in chronological order.

Double command Double commands are process outputs that represent 4 process states
at 2 outputs: 2 determined states (for example, ON/OFF) and 2
undetermined states (for example, fault positions).

Double-point Double-point indications are items of process information that represent


indication 4 process states at 2 inputs: 2 determined states (for example, ON/OFF)
and 2 undetermined states (for example, fault positions).

DP Double-point indication

DPDM Digital pulse duration modulation

Drag and drop Copy, move, and shortcut function that is commonly used on graphic
user interfaces. Objects are selected with the mouse, held, and moved
from one data area to another.

Electrical fast Procedure for testing interference immunity (for example, of the process
transient (burst) inputs/outputs). The type of coupling and the physical magnitudes are
defined in the IEC 608014 standard.

Electromagnetic Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) designates the ability of electrical


compatibility equipment to function properly in a defined environment without affecting
that environment in an unacceptable way.

EMC Electromagnetic compatibility

Environmental Environmental conditions comprise all external disturbing influences to


conditions which electrical equipment might be exposed:
Temperature, humidity, electrostatic and electromagnetic fields,
mechanical impacts, and so on.

EP Protection device information, tab card in COM TC

EPE Event buffer for the inputs

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 383


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

EPROM An EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) is a voltage-


independent, permanently-programmed memory for programs and data.

Equipotential Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) that brings the


bonding housings of electrical equipment and other conductive station
components to equal or nearly equal potential to prevent interference or
hazardous voltages between those components.

Error response Response to a runtime error. Possible responses of the operating


system are:
G Transition of the automation system to the STOP status
G Invocation of an organizational block/an error task that contains a
programmed reaction
G Error message.

Error task Error tasks make it possible to react to certain errors that are recognized
by the runtime system during runtime. There are three error classes: I/O
access errors, processor errors, and time-out errors.

ESD protection ESD protection encompasses all means and measures used to protect
electrostatically sensitive devices.

Event buffer The event buffer of the inputs (German abbreviation: EPE) is used to
buffer preprocessed process events. Each event is made available in a
data block. The event buffer is organized on the first-in-first-out
principle. If there is at least one data block in the EPE, a hardware
interrupt is issued to indicate that it is ready for collection.

Expansion The XC2 and XF6 modules are designed as expansion modules of the
module MCP communications processor. They can only be used in
conjunction with the MCP module MCP assembly) to increase the total
number of process-end interfaces. XC2 offers two serial interfaces
RS232 or RS485. XF6 provides six interfaces for connecting fiber optic
cables.

Expansion Rack
rack

Expansion unit An expansion unit is an expansion rack connected to the central


controller and equipped with a power supply module, an interface
module, and further modules.

384 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

FLASH-EPROM (FLASH-EPROM = Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory)


FLASH-EPROMs are like electrically erasable EEPROMs in that they are
able to retain data in the event of a power failure but can be erased far
more quickly. They are used on memory cards.

Fleeting indication Fleeting indications are single-point indications that are present only
for a very short time, where only the rising edge of the process signal is
acquired and processed in real time.

Floating Isolated

FM Function module Function module

Frame, electronic Frame designates all interconnected inactive parts of electrical


ground equipment, which must not carry any hazardous touch voltage, not even
in the event of a fault.

Front connector Process-end 48-way module connector. Can be obtained with screw,
crimp, and spring-loaded contacts. Wire cross-sections up to 1.5 mm2,
The available cable space must be observed.

Function According to IEC 1131-3, a function (FC) is a code block without any
static data. A function offers the possibility of handing over parameters in
the application program. Therefore functions are suitable for
programming frequently recurring complex functions (for example,
calculations).

Functional Grounding whose sole purpose is to guarantee that the electrical


grounding equipment functions as intended. Functional grounding short-circuits
interference voltages that would otherwise lead to inadmissible
interferences in the electrical equipment.

Functionmodule Function modules are intelligent signal converters that preprocess


process information, thus relieving the CPU. Configuration of the
FMs is effected using parameters.

General On system startup, the state of all process inputs, of the status and the
interrogation (GI) fault image is checked. This information is used to update the system-
end process image. It is also possible to check the current process state
after data loss by means of a GI.

Global data Global data are data that can be addressed from each code block.
That includes inputs I, outputs O, and data blocks DB. Global data can
be accessed either absolutely or symbolically.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 385


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

GPS Satellites with atomic clocks on board revolve around the earth twice a
day on different orbits at an altitude of about 20,000 km. They broadcast
signals that include the GPS universal time.
The GPS receiver determines its own position on the basis of the signals
received. It can derive the delay time of the satellite signal from the
position and thus correct the GPS universal time broadcast.

Ground The conductive soil whose electric potential can be equated with zero at
any point.

Ground reference Ground


plane, reference
Near ground electrodes, the soil can have a potential not equal to zero.
ground
This phenomenon is often referred to as ground reference plane or
reference ground.

Grounding Grounding means connecting an electroconductive component to


ground using a grounding system.

Grounding system Grounding system encompasses all means and measures used for
grounding.

Group command With a group command, it is possible to output several successive


commands. This function is used, for example, to implement the busbar
change of a feeder in distribution substations.

Grz Basic cycle list: Telecontrol list that processes the information necessary
for communication with higher-level control centers in the monitoring
direction ( COM TC).

Hardware Configuration
configuration

Hardware filter The hardware filter eliminates transient conditions of a digital process
signal:
The value 1 is only transmitted if the signal level reaches at least 80% of
the 1 level for the duration of the parameterized filter time.

Hardware interrupt Hardware interrupts are triggered by hardware interrupt signals. These
interrupt signals can be assigned to a task/an organization block in
order to respond to external process events.

Hierarchical level In a structure with higher-level and subordinate objects, a hierarchical


level consists of objects of the same level.

HMI Human Machine Interface SICAM WinCC

386 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission, international standardization


body
Telecontrol protocol
Bay device protocol

IED Intelligent Electronic Device bay device

IM Interface module for connecting expansion units.

Interface MPI (multipoint interface)


Process-end interfaces

Interrupt For the operating system, an interrupt is an event which controls the
execution of the application program. There are different classes of
interrupt. When an interrupt occurs, the operating system automatically
invokes an assigned organization block, in which the user can program
the desired reaction (for example, in an FB).
Hardware interrupt
Cyclic interrupt

IRIG-B Time signal code of the Inter-Range Instrumentation Group

ISO 9001 The ISO 9000 ff. standards define measures for assuring the quality of a
product from development to production.

Isolated On isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control


and the load circuit are isolated (for example, by optocouplers, relay
contacts, or transformers). Several load circuits can be connected to a
common potential.

IT Metered value (integrated totals)

IWV Indication with value, for example, a protection device indication which
contains the interrupted current or the fault location

Job buffer The job buffer of the outputs (German abbreviation: APA) is used to
buffer commands on the CO (command output) and CR (command
release) function modules. Only one command at a time can be written
into the APA. After the command execution, the APA is cleared again.

K-Bus The K-Bus (communications bus) is a serial backplane bus that is


optimized for the exchange of large data volumes.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 387


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

Load memory The load memory is part of the CPU. It contains the objects generated by
the programming device (PG) and is either implemented on a plug-in
Memory Card or as built-in memory.

Load power supply Power supply for powering the input/output circuits, the sensors and the
actuators.

Main memory The main memory is a RAM on the CPU that the processor accesses
during program execution.

MCP assembly An MCP assembly consists of the MCP communications module and the
XC2 and/or XF6 expansion modules. These modules are linked by
means of lateral connectors and are plugged into the rack as one unit.

MCP module Communications processor

ME_NA Measured value, normalized value

ME_NC Measured value, short floating point

Memory card Memory cards are storage media in credit card format for the CPU. They
are implemented as RAM or FLASH-EPROM.

Metered value Metered values are a processing function that determine the total number
of discrete similar events (count pulses), usually as an integral over a
time period. In the power supply industry, electrical energy is normally
recorded as a metered value (energy import/export, energy
transmission).

MIM Module Information Manager

Module The MIM table shows all connections of the input/output modules that
information have been chosen in the Hardware Configuration as well as the SAS
manager information currently assigned to it.

Module Module parameters are variables that are used to determine the behavior
parameters of the module.

Moving contact An auxiliary contact on the transformer that indicates whether the tap
changing function on the transformer is activated.

388 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

MPI The multipoint interface (MPI) is the programming device interface of the
CPU. It is used as the interface for loading the system configuration
previously parameterized using SICAM plusTOOLS, and for connecting
the SICAM WinCC Human Machine Interface. Using an MPI, it is
possible to realize simple networks. Each station is identified by a unique
address (MPI address).

MPI address MPI

Multiple command With a multiple command, it is possible to output several commands


simultaneously.

Non-isolated On non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the


control and the load circuit are electrically connected.

OB Priority class (M7), Organization block (S7).

Operating system The operating system of the CPU organizes all functions and operations
of the CPU of the CPU that are independent of the control tasks of the application
program.

Operational status The automation systems of the SIMATIC S7/M7 family make use of the
following operational statuses: STOP, STARTUP, RUN.

Organization block Organization blocks (OBs) constitute the interface between the operating
system of the S7-CPU and the application program. The organization
blocks define the order of execution of the application programs.

Parameter Variable of a code block


Variable for determining the behavior of a module (one or more per
module). Each module has appropriate factory settings, which can be
modified with the help of the Hardware Configuration application of
STEP 7-.

P-Bus The P-bus (I/O-bus) is a parallel backplane bus optimized for the rapid
exchange of I/O data.

PCM Pulse code modulation

PDM Pulse duration modulation

Per Lower-level basic cycle list: Telecontrol list that processes the
information necessary for communication with higher-level control
centers in the monitoring direction ( COM TC).

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 389


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

PG Programming device

PII The process input image reflects the current status of the process inputs.
The input modules keep a PII for their inputs. These PIIs are read by the
CPU before each user program cycle and are combined to a system-end
process input image.

PIO The process output image reflects the current status of the process
outputs. After each user program cycle, the CPU copies the system-end
process output image kept in its main memory into the PIO of the output
modules. These output the contents of their PIO at the outputs.

PLC Programmable logic controller

Priority class In the M7 family, priority classes constitute the interface between the
operating system of the CPU and the application program. The tasks
define the order in which the application is executed. The priority classes
are mapped to RMOS tasks. A priority class corresponds to a task.

Process image Reserved areas in the RAM memory of the CPU module. Signal states of
the input and output modules are stored there.

Process-end Interfaces of the communications processors of the SICAM SC or


interfaces the SICAM RTU to higher-level control centers and/or bay devices.

Programmable Programmable logic controllers (PLCs), or programmable controllers, are


logic controller electronic controllers whose functions are stored as a program in the
control unit. Thus the design and the wiring of the device do not depend
upon the function of the controller. Programmable logic controllers have
the same components as computers: they consist of a CPU with memory,
input/output modules (for example, DI, AI, CO, CR), power supply
module (PS) and rack (with a bus system). The I/Os and the
programming language are specially designed to meet the requirements
of control engineering.

Programming Programming devices (PGs) are compact, portable, industry-standard


device personal computers. Their distinguishing features are that they have
special hardware and software features suitable for programmable logic
controllers.

PS Power supply module

Rack A rack consists of a flat aluminum extruded section and the backplane
PCB. The modules are plugged into racks.

390 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

RAM RAM (Random Access Memory) is a semiconductor memory for read/


write accesses. This memory incorporates the main memory of the CPU.

RC Regulation step command

Recpro Application for requesting, archiving, and evaluating fault records that are
connected to the SICAM SC via PROFIBUS FMS.

Release Release is part of command execution. Release switches the command


output voltage through to the checked command output circuit for a
defined time.

RESET The RESET command is use to reset a device/system and force a


restart.

RIO file Relay data Interchange format by Omicron.

RSxxx interface Serial interfaces of the MCP assembly (RS232, RS422/485)

Runtime error Errors that occur during execution of the application program in the
automation system (that is, not in the process).

SA Switch authority command

SAS information Items of SAS information are objects in the PG/PC that are used to
organize the distribution of individual items of information in the SICAM
runtime system. Each SAS information item represents a certain
indication or a certain command to be distributed within the system. This
distribution takes place both between modules and between the
connected devices and stations.

S-Bus Via the S-bus, the external interfaces of the MCP communications
module and its expansion modules XC2 and XF6 are assigned to the
interfaces of the MCP controller.

SC_PER Single command, persistent command

SC_PUL Single command, pulse command

SC-CPU CPU of the SICAM SC from the SIMATIC M7-400 family.

SE_Dx Digital setpoint value (setpoint command digital x bits)


x designates the size on bits (8 or 16 bits).

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 391


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

SE_NA Analog scheduled value (setpoint command, normalized value)

SE_NC Analog scheduled value (setpoint command, short floating point)

Shielding Grounding whose sole purpose is to guarantee that the electrical


equipment functions as intended. Shielding short-circuits interference
voltages that would otherwise lead to inadmissible interferences in the
electrical equipment.

Short-time Single-point indications are parameterized as short-time indications if


indication they are available in the system only for a short time and must therefore
be retained for some time in order to guarantee that they are detected
reliably.

SICAM RTU Modular terminal unit based on the SIMATIC S7 automation system.

SICAM SAS Modular substation automation system based on the SICAM SC and
the SICAM WinCC Human Machine Interface.

SICAM SC Substation Controller. Modular substation controller based on the


SIMATIC M7 automation system.

SICAM WinCC The SICAM WinCC Human Machine Interface represents the state of
your power system graphically, visualizes interrupts and indications,
archives the power system data, enables you to intervene manually in the
process, and manages the system access rights of each employee.

Signal module Signal module

Signal module Signal modules (SM) are signal converters without any intelligence of
their own that perform signal level adaptation between the process and
the automation system.

Signal status Signal status indications are the display elements (LEDs, light-emitting
indications diodes) on the front panel of the modules. They indicate the status of the
process inputs and outputs. For example, the signal status indicator of a
digital input module lights up if the input voltage is applied to the
corresponding input.

Signaling circuit A signaling circuit is a circuit used to generate an indication. It includes


the signaling-circuit voltage, the signaling contact, and the wiring leading
to the input of the DI module.

SIM The SICAM Information Manager application is used to manage the SAS
information of the system.

392 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

SIM Browser SICAM Information Browser

SIMATIC Manager The SIMATIC Manager is a tool used for configuring the hardware of the
Substation Controller. The SIMATIC Manager constitutes the platform
for SICAM plusTOOLS.

Single command Single commands are process outputs that represent 2 process states at
1 output (for example, ON/OFF).

Single-point Single-point indications are items of process information that represent 2


indication process states at 1 input (for example, ON/OFF).

Slot A slot is the position in a rack where the modules of an automation


system are mounted. For some modules (for example, PS power supply
module, IM interface module), there are fixed slot positions.

SMC Marker command for setting a marker (flag) through the Human-Machine
Interface.

SP Single-point indication

SP_F Fleeting indication (single-point, fleeting)

SP_S Short-time indication (single-point, short-time)

ST Transformer tap indication (step position information)

STARTUP STARTUP is the operational status passed through during the transition
from the STOP operational status to the RUN operational status. The
change of the operational status can be triggered by the mode selector
switch, after Power-ON or by operator input at the programming device.

Station The station configuration file (*.CSV) contains information about


configuration file protection devices whose fault records are requested, archived, and
evaluated using SICAM Recpro. One such file is generated per station by
the configuration system SICAM plusTOOLS.

Station topology Distribution of the system data over different hierarchical levels and
assignment of devices to these hierarchical levels.

Status/ Status and fault indications are LEDs that are located on the front panel
fault indications of S7-400 or M7-400 modules. They provide information about status of
the module.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 393


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

STEP 7 STEP 7 is used as the basic software for SICAM plusTOOLS and for
CFC. STEP 7 incorporates the programming languages LAD and STL.

Substation SICAM SC
controller

Substation SICAM SAS


Automation System

Substation SICAM SC
Controller

Surge immunity Surge voltage

Surge voltage Procedure for testing the interference immunity (for example, of the
process inputs/outputs) according to IEC 602555. The type of coupling
and the physical magnitudes (peak voltage, rate of rise, and so on) are
defined in the IEC standard.

System data blocks System data blocks (SDBs) are data areas in the program that contain
the system data and that determine operational sequences.

System function A system function block (SFB) is a function block that is integrated in the
block operating system of the CPU. It can be invoked from the STEP 7
application program as required.

System function A system function call (SFC) is the invocation routine of a system function
call that is integrated in the operating system of the CPU. With function
modules, SFCs are used for reading out the event buffer of the inputs
(EPE), writing to the job buffer of the outputs (APA), and transferring
control commands.

System memory The system memory is integrated on the CPU and implemented as RAM.
The system memory contains the operand areas (for example, timers,
counters, flags) as well as the data areas used internally by the operating
system (for example, stack memory area).

Task Tasks constitute the interface between the operating system of the
M7-CPU and the application program. Tasks define the order in which
application programs are executed. A task corresponds to an OB (S7) or
a priority class (M7).

TCC Telecontrol Center, higher-level control center communicating with the


SICAM SC.

394 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

Telecontrol Protocol that is used for communication between the substation


protocol controller and control centers, for example, IEC 60870-5-101

Thresholds Thresholds are a processing function on analog input modules that is


used to reduce the volume of input data. It nevertheless permits minor
signal changes to be processed, provided they persist for long enough.

Time stamping Time stamping means assigning the real time to a process event. Time
stamping on the FMs is in milliseconds, seconds, and minutes. The hour
and the date are added on the CPU.

Transducer A transducer is an electrical device for the potential isolation and the
conversion of a wide variety of measured variables to standardized
measuring signals (for example, load-independent direct current).

Transformer tap A transformer tap indication is a processing function on DI modules that


indication makes it possible to acquire and process the different transformer tap
positions.

Transmission Telecontrol protocol


protocols Bay device protocol

TSPmZ Telegram buffer list with time stamp: Telecontrol list that processes the
information necessary for communication with higher-level control
centers in the monitoring direction ( COM TC).

TSPoZ Telegram buffer list without time stamp: Telecontrol list that processes
the information necessary for communication with higher-level control
centers in the monitoring direction ( COM TC).

Ungrounded Without any electrical connection to ground.

Valpro Value Processing. SICAM application for editing and processing


measured and metered value graphs.

VDEW Vereinigung Deutscher Elektrizittswerke (Association of German Power


Plants), standardization body.

Version identifier The version identifier allows the user to identify a module. It includes the
type, hardware/software release, and date of creation.

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 395


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Glossary

VFD number Virtual Field Device number, logical address of the applications
communicating through PROFIBUS FMS, for example, WinCC, Recpro.
To ensure unique identification, consecutive numbers are used, starting
with 1.

Watchdog A watchdog is a hardware circuit for monitoring a microprocessor. If the


periodic restart of an interval fails to occur because of a hardware or
software fault, an interrupt (NMI) is triggered on the microprocessor.

WinCC SICAM WinCC

X21 X21 is a synchronous interface in which the transmission rate is defined


by an external clock frequency (for example, by the control center).

X-Bus The X-bus handles control of the serial multiplexer of the MCP
communications module and its XC2 and XF6 expansion modules.

XC2 Expansion module within the MCP assembly for connecting the
SICAM SC to higher-level control centers and for connecting bay
devices having serial interfaces.

XF6 Expansion module in the MCP assembly for connecting


Bay devices with fiber-optic interfaces.

Z Counter-controlled list: Telecontrol list that processes the information


necessary for communication with higher-level control centers in the
monitoring direction ( COM TC).

Ze Time-controlled list: Telecontrol list that processes the information


necessary for communication with higher-level control centers in the
monitoring direction ( COM TC).

396 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Index

A CFC 276, 312, 331


AI module 151, 204 Block catalog 23
Analog input module AI 6 Blocks 21, 22, 100
Applications 16 Changes 302, 320
Archive 29, 364 Chart container 302, 337
Demo projects 366 Command processing 107 , 336
Libraries 365 Command with command release 337
User projects 365 Configuring functions 293 , 315, 336
WinZip 29, 364 Creating variables 107, 316, 336
Derived information 108, 293, 315
B Module inputs 316
Basic cycle list 271 Module outputs 315
Basic modules Parameterizing blocks 294, 302, 317,
General 6 337
Baud rate 192 CFC blocks
Bay controllers 86, 214 Switching between display modes 118 ,
Bay device 318
DNP V3.00 214 CFC start
Hardware catalog 215 Calling CFC 110, 295
IEC 60870-5-103 214 Creating chart container 109, 294
PROFIBUS FMS 222 Clock control 156
Profibus FMS 214 CO module 151, 198
PROFIBUS-DP 189 COM IED 3, 20, 52, 86, 212, 213, 277, 289,
Properties 218 308, 326
SIPROTEC 4 214 Tab cards 229
Bay device types Table 229
Inserting 189 COM TC 4, 20, 53, 100, 128, 247, 277, 312,
Bay device.PROFIBUS DP 215 331
Bay devices 3, 7, 150, 212 Address structure 262
Catalog 86, 214 Control direction 248
Connection 86, 220 Exiting 132
Inserting 86, 217 Monitoring direction 248
Properties 218 Command block 337
Protocol 150, 161 Command blocks
Selecting the information volume 94, 231 Inserting 121, 125, 337, 342
Sorting information 93, 228 Interconnecting 124, 126, 341, 343
Bit pattern indication 195 Parameterizing 122 , 125, 339, 342
Command output module CO 6
C Command release 6, 8, 76, 78, 103, 198,
Catalogs 14 335, 337
Central rack 59, 148, 149 Commands
Double command 200
Single command 200
Transformer tap command 200

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 399


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Index

Commissioning 345 DNP 3.0 9


Communication modules 66 DNP V3.00 158 , 174, 182, 260
Communications processor 6, 9, 66, 150, Docpro 41
156, 157 Double command 200
Compiling 23, 346 Double-point indication 194
Configuration Downloading 21, 354
Procedure 51 Drag-and-drop 17
Configuration example 7, 64 Drop-down
Configuring priority classes/tasks 114, 299 Combo box 14
Connection 23 Lists 14
Container 16 DSF file 216
Context menu 15 , 146 Installation 216
Control center 5, 22, 150, 161
Connection 128, 247 E
Control direction 263 Expansion modules 9, 70, 150, 157, 159
Creating a connection 69 Expansion racks 8, 62, 146, 148, 149
Control center connection 4 External interfaces 70, 157
Control direction 263
Copy functions 17 F
Copying 146 Fleeting indication 194, 202
Counter-controlled list 272
G
Coupling
Generic blocks
Local link 149
Specifying I/Os 118, 318
Remote link 149
GPS 66, 156
CP 443 150
Groups
CPU 20, 52, 146, 149, 355
Creating 283
CPU module 61
Structuring 284
CPUs 61
CR module 146, 151, 201, 202 H
Creating Hardware
Chart container 109, 294 Catalog 58, 140
Overview 5
D
Hardware catalog
Data pane 37
Extending 189
Data type
Hardware components
Module 374
Selecting 148
SICAM SAS PD structure 374
Hardware Configuration 138
SIM table 374
Calling up 58, 140
Using the 374
Control functions 146
DCF77 66, 67, 156
CPUs 61
Defining
Exit 82
CFC standard priority class 116, 301
General information 138
Defining the standard priority class 116, 301
Icon 20
Deleting 146
Inserting input/output modules 63
Derived information 96, 276, 306
Overview 57, 138
DI module 151, 192
Parameterizing 65
Diagnosis alarm release 70, 74, 145, 157,
Rules 8
201, 204
Saving 209
Digital input module DI 6
Settings 141
Digital output 198, 201
Hardware configuration 3
DIGSI 4
Hardware parameterization
Parameterizing SIPROTEC devices 222
Opening the dialog box 143
DIGSI V4 41
Help 23

400 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Index

Hierarchical levels 37, 283 L


HMI 100, 105, 292, 314, 333 Links 18
Human Machine Interface 103, 276, 292, Local link 149
306, 314, 324, 333
M
I Managing M7 system 356
Icons 19 MCP
IEC 60870-5-101 9, 68, 158, 251 Replacing firmware 358
Control direction 128 MCP assembly 5, 6, 8, 9, 20, 53, 61, 66,
Monitoring direction 130, 267 146, 150, 155, 357
IEC 60870-5-101 (COM IED) 183 Menu
IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC) 162 Context menu 15
IEC 60870-5-103 9, 158, 181 Context-sensitive 15
IEC 60870-5-104 9, 158, 169, 255 Message numbers 152, 348
IF964 149 Metered value capturing 196
IF964-DP 191 MIM Table 97, 282, 309
Importing CFC blocks 111, 296 Module
Indication blocks Command output 76
Inserting 117, 317 Modules
Interconnecting 119, 319 AI module 204
Indications Analog input 63, 79, 80, 151
Bit pattern indication 195 CO module 198
Double-point indication 194 Command output 63, 151
Fleeting indication 194 Command release 63 , 78, 151
Metered value capturing 195, 196, 197 Communication modules 66
Single-point indication 193 CPU 8, 9, 149, 153
Information distribution 100 CR module 201
Information points 5 DI module 74, 192
Type 5 Digital input 63, 74, 151
Initiation buffer list 272 IM module 8, 81
Input/output modules 6, 63, 151 Inserting 60, 147
Inserting Interface modules 81, 207
Command blocks 121, 125, 337, 342 MCP assembly 66, 155
Indication blocks 117, 317 Parameterizing 152
PROFIBUS interface 61 Power supply 149
SICAM SAS demo station 36 PS module 61
SIPROTEC device 223 Monitoring direction 22
Installation requirements 40 Moving 146
Interconnecting MPI (multipoint interface) 40, 52
Command blocks 124, 126, 341, 343 Multiple selection 18
Indication blocks 119, 319
Interface modules 6, 8, 81, 149 N
Interfaces 9 Navigation pane 37
External 150, 157, 161 Numerical protection relays 86
MPI 55
Optical fiber cable 150 O
Standards 157 Off-line view 15, 19
On-line view 15, 19

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 401


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Index

Operating Instructions R
Buttons 14 Rack 8, 59, 148, 207
Check boxes 13 Receive IM 149
Drag-and-drop 17 Receive interface module 8, 62, 81, 146
Drop-down combo boxes 14 Remote link 149
Drop-down lists 14 Retrieving 367
Group box 13
Off-line/on-line view 15 S
Option buttons 13 Sample bay devices 232
Selection box 14 SAS information
Tab cards 13 Assigning 285
Operating system 40 Changing the source 286
Optical fiber cable 150 Changing the target 286
Optional products 41 , 43, 47 Creating 96 , 97, 307, 325, 327
Creating and linking 99, 311, 330
P Creating connections 97, 309, 327
Parameterization Defining connections 310, 329
AI module 79, 80 Deleting 289
CO module 76 Disconnecting links 312, 331
CR module 78 Linking 308, 326
DI module 74 Renaming 287
Substation Controller 143 Selecting for HMI 292, 314, 333
Parameterizing Structuring 95, 283
Command blocks 122, 125, 339, 342 Scan list 272
PROFIBUS interface 61 Selection box 14
PROFIBUS network nodes 83 Send IM 149, 207
SIPROTEC device 223 Send interface module 8, 62, 81, 146
Performance 161 Setpoint values
Persistent commands 198 Digital 198
Plausibility checks 12, 60, 147 SICAM Information Manager 4, 20, 53, 100
Power supply module PS 61 , 149 MIM Table 4
Preparing CFC SIM Browser 4
Configuring priority classes/tasks 114, SIM Table 4
299 SICAM plusTOOLS 3, 50
Defining the standard priority class 116, Applications 16
301 Basic hardware 40
Importing blocks 111, 296 Folder structure 37
Print 21 Icons 19
Process feedback 101, 102, 334, 335 Operating Instructions 13
Process image mode 198, 203, 282 Symbols 19
PROFIBUS SICAM Report 23, 351
Inserting an interface 61 SICAM SAS
Parameterizing an interface 61 Configuring 50
Parameterizing network nodes 83 Defining demo station 35
Project 19, 21 Insert demo station 36
Copying 33 SICAM SAS demo station
Creating 30 , 54 Defining 35
Managing 32 Inserting 36
Rearranging 32 SICAM WinCC 276, 292, 306, 314, 324, 333
Structure 52 SIM 289
Protection devices 86, 214
Protocols 9, 68, 72, 161

402 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Index

SIM Browser 22, 277, 307, 308, 325, 326 Substation connection 3, 150, 183, 214
Creating groups 95 Substation Controller 7, 56, 150
Creating SAS information 96 Configuring 59
Structuring 95 Switching between display modes 118, 318
SIM Table 100, 278, 292, 314, 333 Symbols 19
Assigning information 103 System expansion 5
SIMATIC Manager 3, 12, 15, 26, 37, 54, System Overview 1
367
Calling system components 16 T
Closing data containers 16 Tab cards
Language 26 Addresses 144
Opening data containers 16 Basic Parameters 145
Setting 26 General 143
SIMEAS Q 215 Module-specific 145
SINAUT 8-FW 9, 158, 161, 166 TCCx 100
SINAUT 8FW 158 TCP/IP 9, 158, 161, 169
Single command 200 TCS IEC 60870-5-101 214
Single-point indication 193, 202 Telecontrol lists 23, 248, 271
SIPROTEC 4 devices 214 Creating 131 , 273
SIPROTEC device Telecontrol protocol 68, 150, 161, 248
Inserting and parameterizing 223 Telegram buffer list with time stamp 272
Software Telegram buffer list without time stamp. 272
Overview 3 TELEGYR 800 9
Specifying the I/Os 118, 318 TELEGYR 800 (COM TC) 178
Spin box 14 Time 67, 72, 156
Standard modules 6, 152, 309, 328 Time signal reception 9, 67, 146, 156
Standard S7 modules 152 Time-controlled list 272
Station 21 Transformer tap positions 200
Creating 56 Transmission protocols 161
Opening 56 Transmission rate 9
Renaming 56
Structure 52 W
Station identification 4 WinZip 29, 364
Station topology 95 Working folder 27
Status indications 284, 309, 328
X
Status information 4
XC2 9, 71, 150, 159
Subordinate basic cycle list 271
XF6 9, 150, 159, 160
Substation automation system 50

SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual 403


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
Index

404 SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


E50417-H8976-C017-A4
To:
Siemens AG
PTD PA D DM
Postfach 4806
90026 Nrnberg, Germany

From:
Your name : ..........................................................................................................
Your title : ..........................................................................................................
Your company : ..........................................................................................................
Department : ..........................................................................................................
Street : ..........................................................................................................
City, State : ..........................................................................................................
Phone : ..........................................................................................................
FAX : ..........................................................................................................

Please indicate your area of work with a checkmark:

G Automation G Building services, air conditioning


G Mining (incl. strip mining) G Heavy machine construction, handling
systems
G Chemical industry
G Power generation G Pipelines

G Power distribution, power system G Shipbuilding, navigation


management G Environmental technology
G Gas/water/sanitary utilities G Traffic and transportation
G Other..................................................................................
Comments / Suggestions

Your comments and suggestions will help us to improve the usability of our
documentation. Please fill out this questionnaire and mail or fax it back to Siemens
(FAX number +49 911 433-8518).

Title of the Manual: SICAM plusTOOLS for SAS Manual


Order no. of the Manual: E50417-H8976-C017-A4

Please answer the following questions by giving a rating between 1 = good


and 5 = poor.

1. Do the contents cover your requirements? ................


2. Were you able to find the information you need easily? ................
3. Did you find the texts easy to understand? ................
4. Does the depth of information meet your requirements? ................
5. How do you rate the quality of the illustrations? ................

If you have encountered any specific problems, please give us a concise description
below:

..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................

S-ar putea să vă placă și